Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 488

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education


*6533820761*

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 February/March 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB15 03_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 The diagram shows the structures of some substances containing carbon.

A B C

Ca2+ CO32– Ca2+ CO32– H H

O C O H C C H
CO32– Ca2+ CO32– Ca2+
H H
Ca2+ CO32– Ca2+ CO32–

CO32– Ca2+ CO32– Ca2+

D E F
Cl
H H
C
C C C H
Cl Cl
H Cl
H H

Answer the following questions about these substances.


Each substance may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(a) Which substance, A, B, C, D, E or F

(i) is a saturated hydrocarbon, ................................................................................................

(ii) has an ionic structure, ........................................................................................................

(iii) is a product of respiration, ..................................................................................................

(iv) is in the same homologous series as methane, .................................................................

(v) is used for cutting? .............................................................................................................


[5]

(b) Substance D is an element.

Explain why substance D is an element.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


3

2 Some properties of the halogens are shown in the table.

boiling point state at room temperature


halogen
/ °C and pressure
fluorine –188

chlorine –35 gas

bromine +59 liquid

iodine +184 solid

astatine solid

(a) Use the information in the table to deduce

(i) the boiling point of astatine,

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) the state of fluorine at room temperature and pressure.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) When chlorine reacts with aqueous potassium iodide, the solution turns brown.

(i) Write a word equation for this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why iodine does not react with aqueous potassium chloride.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) When sodium reacts with iodine, energy is released.

(i) What is the name given to a reaction which releases energy?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain what happens in terms of electron transfer when a sodium atom reacts with an
iodine atom.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


4

3 The diagram shows a limestone column in an industrial town. Limestone is largely calcium
carbonate.

iron pins

column when first built the same column


after 40 years

(a) Describe and explain the changes to the column over 40 years.
In your answer refer to

• the change to the limestone,


• the name of a pollutant causing this change,
• the chemistry involved in this change.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) The sections of the column are joined with iron pins which rust when exposed to the atmosphere.

Describe two methods of rust prevention and explain how they prevent rusting.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


5

(c) Iron is a transition element.

Give two properties of transition elements that make them different from non-transition metals
such as magnesium.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) An isotope of iron has 58 nucleons.

Complete the table to show

• the number of electrons and neutrons in this isotope of iron,


• the relative charges on each particle.

number of each relative charge


particle
particle present on the particle
electron

neutron no charge

proton 26

[4]

(e) Iron reacts with hydrochloric acid to form iron(II) chloride and a gas which ‘pops’ with a lighted
splint.

Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

Fe + ....... HCl → FeCl 2 + ............


[2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


6

4 Ammonium phosphate, (NH4)3PO4, is a fertiliser.

(a) Which two elements in ammonium phosphate are important for plant growth?

............................................................. and ......................................................................... [1]

(b) Aqueous ammonium phosphate can be made in the laboratory by reacting aqueous ammonia
with aqueous phosphoric acid.

aqueous
phosphoric acid
A

flask
aqueous
ammonia

(i) State the name of the piece of apparatus labelled A.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest the pH value of aqueous phosphoric acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Describe how the pH of the mixture in the flask changes as the acid is added.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Which one of the following best describes the reaction of aqueous ammonia with aqueous
phosphoric acid?
Put a ring around the correct answer.

combustion decomposition neutralisation reduction


[1]

(c) When sodium hydroxide is added to ammonium phosphate, ammonia is released.

Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

(NH4)3PO4 + 3NaOH → Na3PO4 + .......NH3 + 3 ...............


[2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


7

5 The table shows the concentration of some ions present in a sample of seawater.

concentration
name of ion formula of ion
in g / dm3
bromide Br – 0.06

calcium Ca2+ 0.30

chloride Cl – 20.00

I– 0.04

magnesium Mg2+ 1.00

potassium K+ 0.50

sodium Na+ 11.00

sulfate SO42– 0.80

(a) (i) Which positive ion in the table has the lowest concentration?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give the name of the ion with the formula I–.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Which two ions in the table are formed from elements in Group II of the Periodic Table?

............................................................ and ................................................................... [1]

(iv) Give the names of two ions in the table which move towards the anode (positive electrode)
when a sample of this seawater is electrolysed.

............................................................ and ................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


8

(b) Sodium chloride can be extracted from seawater.


Concentrated aqueous sodium chloride is electrolysed using the apparatus shown.

battery
+ –

graphite graphite
anode cathode

concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride

(i) Suggest why the anode and cathode are made of graphite.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give the name of the product formed at the cathode (negative electrode).

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Chlorine is formed at the anode.

Complete the electronic structure of a chlorine molecule. Show only the outer shell
electrons.

Cl Cl

[2]

(c) Molten magnesium bromide is electrolysed.

Predict the products at the anode (positive electrode) and cathode (negative electrode).

anode .........................................................................................................................................

cathode ......................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


9

6 Zinc oxide is used for making baby soap and cream for treating sunburn.

(a) Suggest why the zinc oxide used for these purposes needs to be pure.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Zinc oxide can be reduced by carbon. Carbon monoxide is one of the products.

(i) What is the meaning of the term reduction?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Write a word equation for the reaction of zinc oxide with carbon.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why, in the laboratory, the reaction should be carried out in a fume cupboard.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) The table shows how easy it is to reduce various metal oxides by heating with carbon.

metal oxide ease of reduction with carbon

lead oxide easily reduced at 300 °C

magnesium oxide not reduced at 900 °C

nickel oxide easily reduced at 500 °C

zinc oxide fairly easily reduced at 900 °C

Use the information in the table to put the metals in order of their reactivity.

least reactive most reactive

[2]

(d) Zinc oxide reacts with sulfuric acid.

Complete the word equation for this reaction.

zinc oxide + sulfuric acid → zinc sulfate + ............................


[1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


10

(e) Pure dry crystals of zinc sulfate can be made by the reaction of dilute sulfuric acid with excess
zinc.

(i) How is excess zinc removed from the reaction mixture?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Describe how you would obtain pure dry crystals of zinc sulfate from an aqueous solution
of zinc sulfate.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) Zinc sulfate can be made from the reaction of sulfuric acid with zinc oxide or zinc.

Give the name of another compound that reacts with sulfuric acid to produce zinc sulfate.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) A student reacts zinc with excess sulfuric acid.


She obtains 16.1 g of zinc sulfate from 6.5 g of zinc.

(i) Calculate the mass of zinc sulfate she would obtain from 26.0 g of zinc.

[1]

(ii) Calculate the relative formula mass of zinc sulfate, ZnSO4.

[2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


11

7 Petroleum is separated into useful fractions by fractional distillation.

fractions
refinery gas

gasoline fraction

kerosene fraction

diesel oil

fuel oil

lubricating fraction
petroleum

bitumen

(a) (i) Put an X on the diagram to show where the temperature in the column is the highest. [1]

(ii) Give the name of the fraction labelled T.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The lubricating fraction is used to make lubricants.

Give one other use of this fraction.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Each fraction contains alkanes.

Which two of the following statements are correct?


Tick two boxes.

Alkanes burn to form carbon dioxide and hydrogen.

Ethene is an alkane with two carbon atoms.

Alkanes polymerise to form poly(alkanes).

Alkanes are generally unreactive apart from burning.

Methane is an alkane present in natural gas.


[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


12

(c) Hydrogen can be made by cracking.

(i) What is meant by the term cracking?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Complete the equation for the cracking of propane.

C3H8 → ................ + H2
[1]

(d) Ethanol is formed by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene.

(i) Complete the structures of ethene and ethanol in the equation below, showing all atoms
and bonds.

H H
O
C + H C
H H
H H
ethene ethanol
[2]

(ii) What does the symbol mean?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


13

8 A student placed a crystal of purple potassium manganate(VII) on a filter paper which had been
soaked in water.
After 5 minutes, a purple colour had spread out from the crystal.
After 30 minutes, the purple colour had spread further out.

crystal of
potassium wet filter paper
manganate(VII)

at the start after 5 minutes after 30 minutes

(a) Use the kinetic particle theory to explain these observations.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Describe the closeness and motion of the particles in a crystal of potassium manganate(VII).

closeness ...................................................................................................................................

motion ........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Mixtures of dyes can be separated by paper chromatography using the apparatus shown
below.

base line

On the diagram above

• draw a line to show the solvent level at the beginning of the experiment,
• put a cross to show where the spot of dye mixture is placed at the beginning of the
experiment.
[2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/F/M/15


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/22/F/M/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2016

45 Minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*6492011221*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB16 03_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 Two gas jars are set up as shown.

jar 1 jar 1
air

lid

jar 2 jar 2
brown
gas

before after

The lid is removed and the gas jars are left to stand. After some time the contents of both gas jars
are brown.

Which process causes this to happen?

A condensation
B diffusion
C evaporation
D filtration

2 Which piece of apparatus is used to measure variable quantities of liquid in a titration?

A B C D

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


3

3 A sample of a green food colouring was separated into its component colours using paper
chromatography.

The results obtained are shown.

solvent front
yellow spot

blue spot

baseline

What is the Rf value of the blue spot?

A 0.45 B 0.90 C 1.10 D 2.20

4 In which row are the substances correctly classified?

element compound mixture

A brass sulfur water


B sulfur brass water
C sulfur water brass
D water sulfur brass

5 Which molecule contains only single covalent bonds?

A Cl 2 B CO2 C N2 D O2

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


4

6 Which structure represents the sodium chloride lattice?

A B

Na– Cl + Na– Cl + + – + –

Cl + Na– Cl + Na– – + – +

Na– Cl + Na– Cl + + – + –

Cl + Na– Cl + Na– – + – +

C D

– – –
– + – + + + + +
– – –
– – – –
+ – + – + + + +
– – – –


– + – + + + + +
– – – – –
+ – + – + + + +
– – –

7 X and Y are isotopes of the same element.

Which statement is correct?

A X and Y have atoms with different numbers of electron shells.


B X and Y have atoms with the same nucleon number.
C X and Y have atoms with the same number of outer shell electrons.
D X and Y have different chemical properties.

8 Which quantities of chemicals will react exactly with no reactants left over?

A 12 g of carbon and 12 g of oxygen


B 12 g of carbon and 48 g of oxygen
C 12 g of magnesium and 16 g of oxygen
D 24 g of magnesium and 16 g of oxygen

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


5

9 Magnesium nitride is formed when magnesium burns in air. Magnesium nitride is an ionic
compound.

What is the formula of magnesium nitride?

A MgN2 B Mg2N2 C Mg2N3 D Mg3N2

10 The electrolysis of concentrated hydrochloric acid is shown.

chlorine hydrogen

concentrated
hydrochloric acid
platinum
electrodes

+ –

Which statement describes what happens to the electrons during the electrolysis?

A They are added to chloride ions.


B They are added to hydrogen ions.
C They move through the circuit from positive to negative.
D They move through the solution from negative to positive.

11 Which reaction does not occur in the extraction of aluminium?

A Al 3+ + 3e– → Al

B 2Al 2O3 + 3C → 4Al + 3CO2

C 2O2– → O2 + 4e–

D C + O2 → CO2

12 Which substance could not be used as a fuel to heat water in a boiler?

A ethanol
B hydrogen
C methane
D oxygen

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


6

13 Which row describes an endothermic reaction?

energy needed to energy released by


temperature
break bonds / kJ forming bonds / kJ

A 400 200 decreases


B 400 800 decreases
C 600 200 increases
D 600 800 increases

14 A reversible reaction is shown.

2NO2(g) N2O4(g) ∆H = –58 kJ / mol

Which statement about an equilibrium mixture of NO2 and N2O4 is correct?

A If the pressure is decreased the amount of N2O4 increases.


B If the temperature is increased the amount of N2O4 increases.
C The rates of formation and decomposition of N2O4 are not the same.
D The decomposition of N2O4 is an endothermic reaction.

15 Which statement about catalysts in chemical reactions is not correct?

A Catalysts are not used up in the reaction.


B Catalysts increase the energy of the reacting particles.
C Catalysts increase the rate of the reaction.
D Catalysts lower the activation energy.

16 Zinc is extracted from zinc blende by roasting it in air to form zinc oxide.

The zinc oxide is then heated with carbon to form zinc.

The equations for the reactions are shown.

1 2ZnS + 3O2 → 2ZnO + 2SO2

2 ZnO + C → Zn + CO

Which statement about reactions 1 and 2 is not correct?

A In reaction 1 the oxidation state of sulfur increases and it is oxidised.


B In reaction 1 the oxidation state of zinc increases and it is oxidised.
C In reaction 2 the carbon acts as a reducing agent and it is oxidised.
D In reaction 2 the oxidation state of zinc decreases and it is reduced.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


7

17 The diagram shows an energy level diagram for a reaction.

Ea

energy

The diagram shows that the reaction is ......1...... .

Increasing the temperature increases the rate of reaction. A reason for this is that the ......2....... .

Which words correctly complete gaps 1 and 2?

1 2

A endothermic activation energy decreases


B endothermic collision rate increases
C exothermic activation energy decreases
D exothermic collision rate increases

18 Concentrated hydrochloric acid is a strong acid.

What is meant by the terms ‘strong’ and ‘acid’?

strong acid

A contains a low proportion of water accepts protons


B contains a low proportion of water donates protons
C fully ionised accepts protons
D fully ionised donates protons

19 Which oxide is amphoteric?

A aluminium oxide
B calcium oxide
C carbon monoxide
D sodium oxide

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


8

20 A salt is made by adding an excess of an insoluble metal oxide to an acid.

How is the excess metal oxide removed from the mixture?

A chromatography
B crystallisation
C distillation
D filtration

21 A substance is heated with aluminium foil in aqueous sodium hydroxide. A gas is produced which
turns damp, red litmus paper blue.

Which anion is present in the substance?

A carbonate
B iodide
C nitrate
D sulfate

22 An element does not conduct electricity and exists as diatomic molecules.

Where in the Periodic Table is the element found?

A C D
B

23 In the Periodic Table, how does the metallic character of the elements vary from left to right
across a period?

A It decreases.
B It increases.
C It increases then decreases.
D It stays the same.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


9

24 The elements in a group of the Periodic Table show the following trends.

1 The element with the lowest proton number has the lowest reactivity.
2 All the elements in the group form basic oxides.
3 The density of the elements increases down the group.
4 The melting point of the elements decreases down the group.

In which group are the elements found?

A I B IV C VI D VII

25 Brass is an alloy of two metals.

Which row gives a correct use for the two metals from which brass is made?

metal 1 metal 2

A used for electrical wiring used for galvanising steel


B used for galvanising steel used for making aircraft
C used for making aircraft used for making cutlery
D used for making cooking pans used for electrical wiring

26 Iron is extracted from hematite in the blast furnace.

The hematite contains silicon(IV) oxide (sand) as an impurity.

What reacts with this impurity to remove it?

A calcium oxide
B carbon
C carbon dioxide
D slag

27 The reaction below is called the ‘thermite reaction’.

2Al + Fe2O3 → 2Fe + Al 2O3

Which pair of substances reacts in a similar way?

A Fe and MgO
B Fe and ZnO
C Mg and CuO
D Zn and Al 2O3

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


10

28 One method of preventing the rusting of iron is to keep oxygen away from the surface of the
metal.

Which way of rust prevention does not use this method?

A coating the iron with grease


B connecting the iron to a more reactive metal
C covering the iron with plastic
D painting the iron

29 The diagram shows how water is treated to make it suitable for drinking.

stage 1 stage 2 stage 3 stage 4

drinking
reservoir chlorination
water

What happens in stage 2?

A condensation
B distillation
C evaporation
D filtration

30 Nitrogen monoxide is produced in a car engine when petrol is burnt.

The gases from the car engine are passed through a catalytic converter.

In the catalytic converter the nitrogen monoxide reacts with carbon monoxide to form nitrogen
and carbon dioxide.

Which statement is not correct?

A Carbon monoxide is oxidised in the catalytic converter.


B Carbon monoxide is produced by the complete combustion of petrol.
C Nitrogen monoxide is formed by the reaction of nitrogen and oxygen.
D Nitrogen monoxide is reduced in the catalytic converter.

31 Which pollutant gas can be produced as a result of incomplete combustion of octane, C8H18?

A carbon
B carbon dioxide
C carbon monoxide
D methane

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


11

32 Fertilisers are used to provide three elements needed to increase the yield of crops.

Which two compounds would provide all three of these elements?

A ammonium nitrate and calcium phosphate


B ammonium nitrate and potassium sulfate
C potassium nitrate and calcium phosphate
D potassium nitrate and potassium sulfate

33 What is a property of concentrated sulfuric acid but not of dilute sulfuric acid?

A It is a dehydrating agent.
B It neutralises alkalis.
C It produces a white precipitate with barium nitrate.
D It reacts with metals to give a salt and hydrogen.

34 Why does a farmer put lime (calcium oxide) on the soil?

A to act as a fertiliser
B to kill pests
C to make the soil less acidic
D to make the soil less alkaline

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


12

35 What is the name of fraction X?

fractions
refinery gas

gasoline

kerosene

diesel oil

lubricating fraction

petroleum

bitumen

A alcohol
B fuel oil
C naphtha
D paraffin

36 Which compounds are alkanes?

compound W X Y Z
formula C4H10 C5H10 C6H12 C6H14

A W and X B W and Z C X and Y D Y and Z

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


13

37 The statements below are about the alcohol homologous series.

The alcohols have the same ......1...... formula.

The alcohols have ......2...... chemical properties because they have the same ......3...... .

The melting points of the alcohols ......4...... as the number of carbon atoms increases.

Which words correctly complete gaps 1–4?

1 2 3 4

A general different functional group decrease


B general similar electronic structure increase
C general similar functional group increase
D molecular similar functional group increase

38 Which structure represents a compound that dissolves in water to form an acidic solution?

A B
H H H H H H

H C C C H H C C C

H H H H H

C D
H H H H H H O
H C C C C O H H C C C

H H H H H H O H

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16 [Turn over


14

39 The partial structure of an addition polymer is shown.

H Cl H H H Cl

C C C C C C

H H H Cl H H

What is the structure of the monomer used to make this polymer?

A B C D

H Cl H Cl Cl H Cl H Cl H

C C C C C C C H C C C H

Cl H H H H H H H

40 Which statement about polymers is correct?

A Addition polymers are all biodegradable.


B Condensation polymers can all be hydrolysed to give amino acids.
C Condensation polymers only exist in nature.
D Forming addition polymers produces only one product.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/F/M/16


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/F/M/16
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8977051001*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2016


1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB16 03_0620_62/5RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 The diagrams show the apparatus used to obtain crystals of calcium chloride from a mixture of solid
calcium chloride and solid calcium carbonate.
Calcium chloride is soluble in water and calcium carbonate is insoluble in water.

dish

solid
A B C

(a) Complete the boxes to name the apparatus. [2]

(b) (i) Write down the order in which the apparatus should be used in this experiment.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Name the separation process in C.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) (i) What has been added to the mixture in B?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What is the general name given to the liquid in the dish in C?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) How would you know when to stop heating the dish in A?

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


3

2 A teacher investigated the rate of a reaction between two solutions, J and K, and sulfuric acid at
different temperatures.

Four experiments were carried out.

(a) Experiment 1

A large measuring cylinder was used to pour 50 cm3 of distilled water and 40 cm3 of sulfuric acid
into a 250 cm3 conical flask.
A small measuring cylinder was used to add 2 cm3 of methyl orange and 5 cm3 of solution J to
the mixture in the conical flask. The temperature of the mixture was measured.
The reaction was started by adding 5 cm3 of solution K to the conical flask, immediately starting
the timer and swirling the mixture.
The time taken for the mixture to turn pale yellow was measured. The final temperature of the
mixture was measured.

Experiment 2

Experiment 1 was repeated but the mixture in the conical flask was heated to about 30 °C
before adding the solution K. The temperature of the mixture was measured.
5 cm3 of solution K was added to the conical flask. The timer was started and the mixture
swirled.
The time taken for the mixture to turn pale yellow was measured. The final temperature of the
mixture was measured.

Experiment 3

Experiment 1 was repeated but the mixture in the conical flask was heated to about 40 °C
before adding the solution K to the flask. The same measurements were taken.

Experiment 4

Experiment 1 was repeated but the mixture in the conical flask was heated to about 50 °C
before adding the solution K to the flask. The same measurements were taken.

Stop-clock diagrams for these experiments are on page 4.

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16 [Turn over


4

Use the stop-clock diagrams to record the times in the table.

Work out the average temperatures to complete the table.

time taken for


stop-clock initial final average
experiment mixture to
diagram temperature temperature temperature
turn pale yellow
/ °C / °C / °C
/s

0
seconds
0

1 45 15 5 15 17 15

10
30 minutes

0
0

2 45 15 5 15 28 26

10
30

0
0

3 45 15 5 15 42 40

10
30

0
0

4 45 15 5 15 51 49

10
30

[4]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


5

(b) Plot the results on the grid and draw a smooth line graph.

160

140

120

100

time / s
80

60

40

20

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

average temperature / °C
[4]

(c) From your graph deduce the time taken for the mixture to turn pale yellow if Experiment 1 was
repeated at an average temperature of 60 °C.
Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16 [Turn over


6

(d) (i) In which experiment was the rate of reaction greatest?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the rate of reaction was greatest in this experiment.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) (i) Suggest and explain the effect on the results of using a burette to measure the volume of
solution J.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest and explain one other improvement to these experiments.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


7

3 Two solids, L and M, were analysed. Solid L was copper(II) chloride and solid M was a different
salt.
The tests on the solids, and some of the observations, are shown.

tests on solid L

(a) Describe the appearance of solid L.

observation ........................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Distilled water was added to solid L and shaken to dissolve.

The solution was divided into four equal portions in four test-tubes and the following tests
carried out.

(i) Drops of aqueous ammonia were added to the first portion of the solution.

Excess ammonia solution was then added to the mixture and shaken.

observation ..........................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [4]

(ii) Excess aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the second portion of the solution.

observation ..........................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Dilute nitric acid was added to the third portion of the solution followed by aqueous silver
nitrate.

observation .................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Dilute nitric acid was added to the fourth portion of the solution followed by aqueous
barium nitrate.

observation .................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16 [Turn over


8

tests on solid M

Tests are carried out and the following observations made.

tests on solid M observations

Appearance of the solid. white crystals

The solid was heated and the gas given off was a sublimate formed
tested with damp red litmus paper. on the sides of the test-tube

litmus paper turned blue

Solid M was dissolved in water to form a


solution.

Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the pungent gas evolved


solution and the mixture heated. The gas given
off was tested. pH paper showed pH 10

Dilute nitric acid was added to the solution


followed by aqueous silver nitrate. yellow precipitate

(c) Identify solid M.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


9

4 The label on a bottle of orange drink stated ‘contains no artificial colours’. A scientist thought that
the orange colour in the drink was a mixture of two artificial colours:

• Sunset Yellow E110


• Allura Red E129

Plan an investigation to show that the orange colour in the drink did not contain these two artificial
colours.
You are provided with samples of E110, E129 and the orange colouring from the drink. You are also
provided with common laboratory apparatus.
You may draw a diagram to help answer the question.

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/F/M/16


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2017

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*2721741017*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

IB17 03_0620_22/5RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 A gas is released at point Q in the apparatus shown.

point Q

damp Universal
Indicator paper

Which gas changes the colour of the damp Universal Indicator paper most quickly?

relative
gas
molecular mass

A ammonia 17
B carbon dioxide 44
C chlorine 71
D hydrogen 2

2 The diagrams show liquids in a burette and a measuring cylinder.

27 50

40

28 30

burette measuring cylinder

Which row shows the correct readings for the burette and the measuring cylinder?

measuring
burette
cylinder

A 27.8 42
B 27.8 44
C 28.2 42
D 28.2 44

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


3

3 The diagram shows how muddy water can be purified.

muddy water

fine sand

gravel

small pebbles

clean water

Which process for purifying the muddy water is shown?

A crystallisation
B distillation
C filtration
D solvent extraction

4 Which statement explains why isotopes of an element have the same chemical properties?

A They have different numbers of neutrons.


B They have the same number of electrons as protons.
C They have the same number of electrons in the outer shell.
D They have the same number of protons in the nucleus.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


4

5 The formulae of some ions are shown.

positive ions negative ions

Al 3+ Br –
Ca2+ CO32–
Cu2+ NO3–
Fe3+ S2–
K+ SO42–

In which row is the formula not correct?

compound formula

A aluminium sulfate Al 2(SO4)3


B calcium nitrate Ca(NO3)2
C iron(III) bromide Fe3Br
D potassium sulfide K2S

6 Diamond and silicon(IV) oxide both have giant structures.

Which statements are correct?

1 Both substances are compounds.


2 There are strong covalent bonds in diamond.

3 Silicon(IV) oxide is bonded ionically.


4 Both substances have very high melting points.

A 1 and 2 B 2 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

7 Which statement about metals is correct?

A Layers of positive ions can slide over each other making metals malleable.
B Metallic bonding consists of a lattice of negative ions in a sea of delocalised electrons.
C Metallic bonding consists of a lattice of positive ions in a sea of delocalised negative ions.
D Metals conduct electricity because positive ions are free to move.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


5

8 The gas hydrazine has the molecular formula N2H4.

Hydrazine burns in air to form nitrogen gas and steam.

N2H4(g) + O2(g) → N2(g) + 2H2O(g)

Which statements are correct?

1 1 mole of hydrazine gives 72 dm3 of gaseous products when it reacts with oxygen at
room temperature and pressure.
2 The empirical formula of hydrazine is NH2.

3 The total number of atoms in 1 mole of hydrazine is 6 × the Avogadro constant.

4 The volume of 1 mole of hydrazine at room temperature and pressure is 6 × 24 dm3.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 3 and 4 only

9 Copper(II) carbonate is broken down by heating to form copper(II) oxide and carbon dioxide gas.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

CuCO3 → CuO + CO2

31.0 g of copper(II) carbonate are heated until all of the contents of the test-tube have turned
from green to black.

The yield of copper(II) oxide formed is 17.5 g.

What is the percentage yield?

A 19.02% B 21.88% C 56.50% D 87.50%

10 The diagram shows the electrolysis of aqueous copper(II) sulfate.

– +

carbon
electrodes aqueous copper(II) sulfate

Which statement is correct?

A Copper metal is deposited at the positive electrode.


B In the external circuit the electrons move from positive to negative.
C In the solution the electrons move from negative to positive.
D Oxygen gas is produced at the positive electrode.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


6

11 Four solutions are separately electrolysed.

experiment solution electrodes

1 dilute aqueous sodium chloride carbon


2 aqueous copper(II) sulfate copper
3 concentrated hydrochloric acid carbon
4 dilute sulfuric acid carbon

In which two experiments is a colourless gas evolved at the anode?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

12 Ammonia is made by reacting nitrogen with hydrogen in the presence of an iron catalyst.

The reaction is exothermic.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

N2 + 3H2 → 2NH3

The bond energies are shown in the table.

bond bond energy in kJ / mol

H–H 436
N–H 390
N≡N 945

What is the energy given out during this reaction?

A –4593 kJ / mol B –1083 kJ / mol C –959 kJ / mol D –87 kJ / mol

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


7

13 The energy level diagram for the reaction between P and Q to form R and S is shown.

P+Q

energy
R+S

Which row describes the energy changes involved and the type of reaction?

energy changes involved type of reaction


A more energy is given out when the bonds in the products endothermic
are formed than is needed to break the bonds in the reactants
B more energy is given out when the bonds in the products exothermic
are formed than is needed to break the bonds in the reactants
C more energy is needed to break the bonds in the reactants endothermic
than is given out when the bonds in the products are formed
D more energy is needed to break the bonds in the reactants exothermic
than is given out when the bonds in the products are formed

14 Copper(II) carbonate reacts with dilute sulfuric acid.

CuCO3(s) + H2SO4(aq) → CuSO4(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

The rate of the reaction can be changed by varying the conditions.

Which changes always increase the rate of this chemical reaction?

1 increasing the concentration of sulfuric acid

2 increasing the size of the pieces of copper(II) carbonate


3 increasing the temperature
4 increasing the volume of sulfuric acid

A 1, 3 and 4 B 1 and 3 only C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4 only

15 Which reaction is not affected by the presence of light?

A a candle burning
B methane reacting with chlorine
C photosynthesis
D silver bromide decomposing to form silver

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


8

16 The equation for the reversible reaction between hydrogen and iodine to form hydrogen iodide is
shown.

The colours of the reactants and products are shown.

H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI(g)


colourless purple colourless

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Which statement is correct?

A An increase in pressure has no effect on the equilibrium position.


B The purple colour fades when the reaction mixture is heated.
C When equilibrium is reached, both forward and reverse reactions stop.
D When more hydrogen gas is added, the purple colour increases.

17 Chlorine displaces bromine from a solution of potassium bromide.

Cl 2 + 2KBr → 2KCl + Br2

What is the oxidising agent in this reaction?

A bromide ions
B bromine
C chloride ions
D chlorine

18 Beryllium oxide reacts with both sulfuric acid and aqueous sodium hydroxide.

Which type of oxide is beryllium oxide?

A acidic
B amphoteric
C basic
D neutral

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


9

19 A student investigates two acids W and X.

The same volumes of W and X are reacted separately with excess magnesium.

The student makes the following observations.

1 Hydrogen gas is produced at a faster rate with W than with X.


2 The total volume of hydrogen gas produced is the same for both acids.

Which statement explains these observations?

A The pH of W is higher than the pH of X.


B W is an organic acid.
C W is a stronger acid than X.
D W is more concentrated than X.

20 A student is given an unknown solution.

Which two tests provide evidence that the solution is copper(II) sulfate?

1 adding dilute hydrochloric acid


2 adding aqueous sodium hydroxide
3 adding dilute nitric acid, then silver nitrate solution
4 adding dilute nitric acid, then barium nitrate solution

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


10

21 The diagram shows the steps in the preparation of a salt.

step 1 step 2 step 3 step 4

Which salt is prepared by this method?

A barium sulfate

B copper(II) sulfate
C potassium sulfate
D sodium sulfate

22 Which property of elements increases across a period of the Periodic Table?

A metallic character
B number of electron shells
C number of outer shell electrons
D tendency to form positive ions

23 Magnesium, calcium, strontium and barium are Group II elements.

Group II elements follow the same trends as Group I elements.

Which statements about Group II elements are correct?

1 Calcium reacts faster than magnesium with water.


2 Barium reacts less vigorously than magnesium with dilute acid.
3 Strontium oxidises in air more slowly than barium.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


11

24 The noble gases are in Group VIII of the Periodic Table.

Which statement explains why noble gases are unreactive?

A They all have eight electrons in their outer shells.


B They all have full outer shells.
C They are all gases.
D They are all monoatomic.

25 Part of the Periodic Table is shown.

Which element is used as a catalyst?

B C
D

26 Which statement about all metals is correct?

A They are attracted to a magnet.


B They are weak and brittle.
C They may be used to form alloys.
D They react with water.

27 Which substance produces sulfur dioxide when roasted in air?

A bauxite
B cryolite
C hematite
D zinc blende

28 Which metal carbonate does not produce carbon dioxide when it is heated with a Bunsen
burner?

A copper(II) carbonate
B magnesium carbonate
C sodium carbonate
D zinc carbonate

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


12

29 Two experiments are carried out.

In experiment 1, copper is heated with steam.

In experiment 2, copper(II) oxide is heated with carbon.

copper(II) oxide
and carbon
steam

copper
heat

experiment 1 experiment 2

Which row describes what happens in experiments 1 and 2?

experiment 1 experiment 2

A no reaction no reaction
B no reaction reaction
C reaction no reaction
D reaction reaction

30 Which two gases are obtained from liquid air by fractional distillation?

A carbon dioxide and oxygen


B carbon dioxide and water vapour
C nitrogen and oxygen
D nitrogen and water vapour

31 An experiment to find the percentage of oxygen in 150 cm3 of polluted air is shown.

damp measuring cylinder


iron wool
150 cm3 of
polluted air

water

The apparatus is left for one week.

After this time, the volume of gas in the measuring cylinder is 122 cm3.

What is the percentage of oxygen, to the nearest whole number, in the polluted air?

A 19% B 21% C 28% D 81%

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


13

32 Two reactions, X and Y, produce carbon dioxide.

X Y
CH4 CO2 CaCO3

Which types of reaction are X and Y?

X Y

A combustion combustion
B combustion thermal decomposition
C thermal decomposition combustion
D thermal decomposition thermal decomposition

33 The ions present in ammonium sulfate are formed from the products of the Contact and Haber
processes.

Both of these processes involve the use of a catalyst.

Which row is correct?

ion formed from process catalyst

A ammonium ammonia Contact iron


B ammonium ammonia Haber vanadium(V) oxide
C sulfate sulfuric acid Contact vanadium(V) oxide
D sulfate sulfuric acid Haber iron

34 The table shows the composition of four different types of petroleum.

Arabian Heavy Arabian Light Iranian Heavy North Sea


fraction
/% /% /% /%

gasoline 18 21 21 23
kerosene 11 15 13 15
diesel oil 18 21 20 24
fuel oil 53 43 46 38

Which type of petroleum is best for the motor vehicle industry?

A Arabian Heavy
B Arabian Light
C Iranian Heavy
D North Sea

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17 [Turn over


14

35 Which reaction of ethene is not an addition reaction?

A reaction with bromine


B reaction with hydrogen
C reaction with oxygen
D reaction with steam

36 Ethanol is a fuel used in cars. It can be made from petroleum.

C4H10 → C2H4 + C2H6 cracking

C2H4 + H2O → C2H5OH producing ethanol

C2H5OH + 3O2 → 2CO2 + 3H2O burning

Compounds of how many homologous series appear in these equations?

A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4

37 Ethanol is produced from either ethene or sugar.

Which type of chemical reaction is used in each case?

ethene → ethanol sugar → ethanol

A addition fermentation
B addition fractional distillation
C distillation fermentation
D distillation fractional distillation

38 The structural formula of an organic compound is shown.

CH3CH2COOCH3

What is the name of this compound?

A butanoic acid
B ethyl ethanoate
C methyl propanoate
D propyl methanoate

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


15

39 The diagram shows the structure of an important product.

H H H H H H

C C C C C C

H H H H H H

This product is formed by …... 1 .….. of an .….. 2 …… .

Which words complete gaps 1 and 2?

1 2

A addition polymerisation alkane


B addition polymerisation alkene
C cracking alkane
D cracking alkene

40 Which pair of compounds reacts to form a condensation polymer?

A CH3COOH and C2H5NH2


B HCOOH and HOC2H4OH
C HOC6H12OH and HOOCC3H6COOH
D H2NC2H4NH2 and HOC3H6OH

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/F/M/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/F/M/17
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6232664619*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2017


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB17 03_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 (a) Five organic compounds have the following structures.

A B C

H H H H H H H H H H H H

H C C C C H H C C C C H C C C C H

H H H H H H H H H

D E

H H H H H

Br C C Br Br C C C Br

H H H H H

(i) Which compound is butane?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Which two compounds are structural isomers of each other?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Which compound can be made by reacting an alkene with bromine?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Which compound is a saturated hydrocarbon?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) Which compound has the empirical formula C2H5?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(vi) Name the two products made during the complete combustion of compound C.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


3

(b) Petroleum can be separated into useful substances using the apparatus shown.

refinery gas

gasoline fraction

naphtha fraction

diesel oil fraction

Y fuel oil fraction

petroleum

lubricating fraction
and bitumen

(i) Name the fraction which is the most viscous.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Name the fraction with the smallest molecules.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Name the fraction which has the weakest attractive forces between molecules.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Fraction X is used as jet fuel.

Name fraction X.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) What happens at point Y on the diagram?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


4

2 Silver dichromate, Ag2Cr2O7, is a red insoluble salt.

Silver dichromate can be made by reacting silver nitrate solution with ammonium dichromate
solution. The chemical equation for the reaction is shown.

2AgNO3(aq) + (NH4)2Cr2O7(aq) 2NH4NO3(aq) + Ag2Cr2O7(s)

(a) Describe how you could obtain pure dry solid silver dichromate after mixing silver nitrate
solution and ammonium dichromate solution.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) (i) The charge on a silver ion is +1.

Deduce the charge on the dichromate ion in Ag2Cr2O7.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Write the ionic equation for the formation of silver dichromate in this reaction.
State symbols are not required.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) Dilute aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the ammonium nitrate solution made in the
reaction. The mixture was then warmed and damp Universal Indicator paper was held above
the mixture.

State and explain what would happen to the Universal Indicator paper.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


5

(d) The apparatus shown was set up.

plastic trough
S
solid silver nitrate solid
ammonium dichromate

water

After five minutes, a red solid appeared along the line marked S on the diagram.

(i) Explain why a red solid appeared along the line marked S.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [3]

(ii) The experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.

What effect, if any, would this have on the time taken for the red solid to appear? Explain
your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(e) Ammonium dichromate, (NH4)2Cr2O7, undergoes thermal decomposition.


The products are chromium(III) oxide, nitrogen and water.

(i) What is meant by thermal decomposition?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of ammonium dichromate.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


6

3 Nitryl chloride, NO2Cl, reacts with nitric oxide, NO. The forward reaction is exothermic.

NO2Cl (g) + NO(g) NO2(g) + NOCl (g)

The reaction can reach equilibrium.

(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium for a reversible reaction?

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate of reaction.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) State and explain the effect, if any, of increasing the temperature on the position of equilibrium.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) State and explain the effect, if any, of decreasing the pressure on the position of equilibrium.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


7

(e) Nitrosyl chloride, NOCl, is a gas at room temperature. It has the structure shown.

O N Cl

(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the arrangement of the outer shell electrons
in nitrosyl chloride.

O N Cl

[2]

(ii) Nitrosyl chloride has a boiling point of –6 °C.

Explain why nitrosyl chloride has a low boiling point.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


8

4 Copper(II) sulfate solution was electrolysed using the apparatus shown.

– +

carbon cathode carbon anode

copper(II) sulfate
solution

(a) (i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of movement of electrons in the wire.
Label the arrow A. [1]

(ii) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of movement of positive ions in the
copper(II) sulfate solution.
Label the arrow B. [1]

(b) Oxygen was formed at the anode and copper was formed at the cathode.

(i) The ionic half-equation for the formation of oxygen is shown.

4OH– O2 + 2H2O + 4e–

Explain why this reaction is oxidation.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Write the ionic half-equation for the formation of copper at the cathode.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) The electrolysis was repeated using copper electrodes in place of carbon electrodes.

State and explain what happens to the masses of the anode and the cathode during this
electrolysis.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [4]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


9

5 Iron is extracted from its ore using a blast furnace.

(a) In the blast furnace, coke burns in oxygen to produce heat energy and carbon dioxide.

How is this carbon dioxide converted into carbon monoxide in the blast furnace?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Calcium carbonate added to the blast furnace decomposes to form calcium oxide.
Calcium oxide removes silicon(IV) oxide impurities from the iron in a neutralisation reaction.

Write a chemical equation for the reaction of calcium oxide with silicon(IV) oxide. Suggest why
it is a neutralisation reaction.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) The main impurity in iron obtained from the blast furnace is carbon.

(i) Why must the high levels of carbon be lowered before the iron becomes a useful material?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) How is the carbon removed from the iron?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) Z
 inc is extracted from its ore. The ore contains zinc sulfide. The zinc sulfide is roasted in air to
produce zinc oxide and sulfur dioxide.

Zinc is then obtained from the zinc oxide using a blast furnace.

(i) Give the name of the ore of zinc that contains zinc sulfide.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) W
 rite a chemical equation for the reaction that takes place when zinc sulfide is roasted in
air.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Suggest why the sulfur dioxide should not be released into the atmosphere.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


10

(iv) The temperature inside the blast furnace in which zinc is extracted is about 1000 °C.

The table gives some information about substances in the blast furnace in which zinc is
extracted.

substance melting point / °C boiling point / °C


carbon sublimes at 4330 °C
silicon(IV) oxide 1610 2230
zinc 420 907

Use the data in the table to explain why the zinc obtained does not contain high levels of
impurities such as silicon(IV) oxide and carbon.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


11

6 Barium carbonate decomposes when heated.

BaCO3(s) BaO(s) + CO2(g)

(a) A student heated a 10.0 g sample of barium carbonate until it was fully decomposed.

(i) Calculate the number of moles of barium carbonate the student used.

moles of barium carbonate = ............................. mol [2]

(ii) Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide gas produced at room temperature and pressure.
Give your answer in dm3.

volume of carbon dioxide = ............................. dm3 [1]

(b) The student added 2.00 g of the barium oxide produced to water.

BaO + H2O Ba(OH)2

Calculate the mass of barium hydroxide that can be made from 2.00 g of barium oxide. The Mr
of Ba(OH)2 is 171.

mass of barium hydroxide = ............................. g [1]

(c) A 1.50 g sample of barium hydroxide was dissolved in water. The total volume of the solution
was 100 cm3.

A 25.0  cm3 portion of the barium hydroxide solution was titrated against hydrochloric acid. The
volume of hydrochloric acid required was 18.75 cm3.

Ba(OH)2 + 2HCl BaCl 2 + 2H2O

(i) Calculate how many moles of barium hydroxide were in the 25.0 cm3 portion used in the
titration.

moles of barium hydroxide = ............................. mol [1]

(ii) Calculate the concentration of the hydrochloric acid used.

concentration of hydrochloric acid = ............................. mol / dm3 [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


12

7 (a) The diagram shows part of the structure of an addition polymer.

H Cl H Cl H Cl

C C C C C C

H H H H H H

(i) Draw a circle around one repeat unit of the polymer. [1]

(ii) Draw the structure of the monomer from which this addition polymer is made.

[1]

(iii) Aqueous bromine is added to both the polymer and the monomer.

Describe what would be seen in each case.

with the polymer ..................................................................................................................

with the monomer ................................................................................................................


[2]

(b) The diagram shows part of the structure of a condensation polymer.

O O O O

C C N N C C N N

H H H H

(i) What type of condensation polymer is this?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) On the diagram, draw a circle around one repeat unit of the polymer. [1]

(iii) Draw the structures of the two monomers from which the condensation polymer is made.

[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


13

(c) Hydrolysis of a polymer gave a compound with the following composition by mass: C, 34.61%;
H, 3.85%; O, 61.54%.

(i) Calculate the empirical formula of the compound.

empirical formula = ............................ [3]

(ii) What additional information is needed to calculate the molecular formula of the compound?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2017
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/F/M/17
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6948987238*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2017


1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

IB17 03_0620_62/6RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 A student investigated the gases formed during the electrolysis of dilute sulfuric acid using the
apparatus shown.
Hydrogen and oxygen were produced.

carbon ....................................
dilute
sulfuric acid

+ –

(a) Complete the box to name the apparatus used. [1]

(b) On the diagram, sketch how a sample of one of the gases could be collected. [2]

(c) Give a test for oxygen.

test ..............................................................................................................................................

result ...........................................................................................................................................
[1]

(d) The gas collected at the positive side turned limewater milky.

(i) Based on this observation, what gas was present?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest how this gas was formed.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(e) A solution of dilute sulfuric acid was electrolysed for 1 hour.

Suggest why the pH of the solution decreased during the electrolysis.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17


3

Question 2 starts on the next page.

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17 [Turn over


4

2 A student investigated the reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid and two different aqueous
solutions of sodium hydroxide labelled solution O and solution P.

Two experiments were carried out.


Experiment 1

●  burette was filled with dilute hydrochloric acid. The initial burette reading was recorded.
A
● Using a measuring cylinder, 20 cm3 of solution O were poured into a conical flask.
● Thymolphthalein indicator was added to the conical flask.
● The dilute hydrochloric acid was added from the burette, while swirling the flask, until the
solution just changed colour. The final burette reading was recorded.

(a) Use the burette diagrams to record the readings in the table and complete the table.

3 29

4 30

5 31

initial reading final reading

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

difference / cm3
[2]


Experiment 2

●  he conical flask was emptied and rinsed with distilled water.


T
● Experiment 1 was repeated using solution P instead of solution O.

(b) Use the burette diagrams to record the readings in the table and complete the table.

23 29

24 30

25 31

initial reading final reading

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

difference / cm3
[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17


5

(c) 
What type of chemical reaction occurs when dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with
sodium hydroxide solution?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) (i) Which solution of sodium hydroxide, solution O or solution P, is the more concentrated?
Explain your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) How many times more concentrated is this solution of sodium hydroxide than the other
solution of sodium hydroxide?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(e) If Experiment 2 were repeated using 10 cm3 of solution P, what volume of dilute hydrochloric acid
would be needed?

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(f) W
 hat would be the effect, if any, on the volume of dilute hydrochloric acid used in Experiment 1
if the solution of sodium hydroxide were warmed before adding the dilute hydrochloric acid?
Give a reason for your answer.

effect on volume .........................................................................................................................

reason .........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(g) (i) What would be a more accurate method of measuring the volume of the aqueous sodium
hydroxide solution?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest how the reliability of the results could be checked.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(h) Aqueous sodium hydroxide reacts with aqueous calcium chloride to form a precipitate of
calcium hydroxide.

Use this information to suggest a different method of finding out which of the solutions of
sodium hydroxide is the more concentrated.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17 [Turn over


6

3 Two solids, Q and R, which are both salts, were analysed. Solid Q was zinc bromide.
Tests were carried out on each solid.

tests on solid Q

Solid Q was dissolved in distilled water.


The solution was divided into three equal portions in three test-tubes, and the following tests were
carried out.

Complete the expected observations.

(a) (i) D
 rops of aqueous sodium hydroxide were added to the first portion of the solution until a
change was seen.

observations .................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) Excess aqueous sodium hydroxide was then added to the mixture.

observations .................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) Drops of aqueous ammonia were added to the second portion of the solution until a change
was seen.

observations .................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Excess aqueous ammonia was then added to the mixture.

observations .................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added to the third portion of the solution.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17


7

tests on solid R

Tests were carried out and the following observations made.

tests on solid R observations

test 1

A flame test was carried out on solid R. yellow colour

Solid R was dissolved in distilled water. The


solution was divided into two equal portions in
two test-tubes.

test 2

Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate no change


were added to the first portion of the solution.

test 3

Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate


were added to the second portion of the yellow precipitate formed
solution.

(d) Identify solid R.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17 [Turn over


8

4 When solid barium hydroxide is added to solid ammonium chloride a reaction takes place.

(a) Describe an experiment to show that this reaction is endothermic.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [4]

(b) How could you show whether or not the final mixture contains ammonium ions?

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/F/M/17


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2018

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*3036484056*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB18 03_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Hydrogen chloride gas, HCl, reacts with ammonia gas, NH3, to form solid ammonium chloride.

The apparatus is set up as shown.

After a few minutes, solid ammonium chloride forms where the two gases meet.

solid ammonium chloride

source of source of
hydrogen chloride gas ammonia gas

The experiment is repeated using hydrogen bromide, HBr, in place of hydrogen chloride.

How far along the tube does the solid ammonium bromide form?

A B C D

source of source of
hydrogen bromide gas ammonia gas

2 Substance L melts at –7 °C and is a brown liquid at room temperature.

Which temperature is the boiling point of pure L?

A –77 °C

B –7 °C to +7 °C

C 59 °C

D 107 °C to 117 °C

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


3

3 Chromatography is done on a mixture containing a drug. The drug has an Rf value of 0.66.

The diagram is not drawn to scale.

Which spot on the chromatogram represents the drug?

solvent front

15 cm
12 cm
9.9 cm

C
0.66 cm
baseline D

4 Caesium, Cs, is an element in Group I of the Periodic Table.

When caesium reacts it forms a positive ion, Cs+.

How is a caesium ion formed?

A A caesium atom gains a proton.


B A caesium atom gains an electron.
C A caesium atom loses an electron.
D A caesium atom shares an electron.

5 The structure of copper is described as a lattice of positive ions in a ‘sea of electrons’.

Which statements are correct?

1 Copper has a high melting point because of the strong electrostatic attraction
between the positive ions and the ‘sea of electrons’.
2 Copper is malleable because the layers of atoms in the lattice can slide over each
other.
3 Copper atoms can be oxidised to form copper ions by losing electrons.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


4

6 Three statements about diamond, graphite and silicon(IV) oxide are listed.

1 Diamond and graphite both have giant covalent structures.

2 In silicon(IV) oxide, silicon and oxygen atoms are joined together by covalent bonds
throughout the whole structure.

3 Diamond and silicon(IV) oxide have similar structures.

Which statements are correct?

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

7 The concentration of a hydrochloric acid solution is 0.5 mol / dm3.

How many moles of hydrochloric acid are present in 25 cm3 of this solution?

A 0.0125 B 0.0200 C 12.5 D 20.0

8 A sample of an iron oxide contains 50.4 g of iron and 21.6 g of oxygen.

What is the empirical formula of the iron oxide?

A FeO B FeO3 C Fe2O3 D Fe3O2

9 A solution of copper(II) sulfate can be electrolysed using copper electrodes or carbon electrodes.

Which statements are correct?

1 Using copper electrodes, oxygen gas forms at the anode.


2 Using copper electrodes, copper atoms lose electrons at the anode.
3 Using carbon electrodes, copper metal forms at the cathode.
4 Using carbon electrodes, copper ions gain electrons at the cathode.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2, 3 and 4 D 4 only

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


5

10 Pairs of metals are connected together to make a simple cell, as shown.

voltmeter
V

metal 1 metal 2

electrolyte

The table shows the reading on the voltmeter when different metals are used.

metal 2
beryllium cerium cobalt manganese

beryllium 0.00 V +0.64 V –1.57 V –0.67 V


metal 1

cerium 0.00 V –2.21 V –1.30 V


cobalt 0.00 V +0.90 V
manganese 0.00 V

If metal 2 is more reactive than metal 1, the voltage measured is positive.

The greater the difference in reactivity of the metals, the larger the reading on the voltmeter.

What is the order of reactivity?

most least
reactive reactive

A cerium beryllium cobalt manganese


B cerium beryllium manganese cobalt
C cobalt manganese beryllium cerium
D cobalt manganese cerium beryllium

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


6

11 The energy level diagram for the reaction between X2 and Y2 to form XY gas is shown.

X2(g) + Y2(g)
energy
2XY(g)

progress of reaction

Which statement is correct?

A Energy is released when X2 and Y2 bonds are broken.


B Energy is needed to form XY bonds.

C The energy change, ∆H, for the reaction is negative.


D The reaction is endothermic.

12 Methane burns in oxygen to form carbon dioxide and water.

CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O

The bond energies are shown in the table.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

C–H +410
C=O +805
O–H +460
O=O +496

What is the energy change for the reaction?

A –818 kJ / mol
B –323 kJ / mol
C +323 kJ / mol
D +818 kJ / mol

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


7

13 Methanol is made by reacting carbon monoxide with hydrogen. The reaction is reversible.

CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Which combination of temperature and pressure gives the highest equilibrium yield of methanol?

temperature pressure
/ °C / atmospheres

A 200 10
B 200 200
C 600 10
D 600 200

14 The ionic equation for the reaction between zinc and aqueous copper ions is shown.

Zn(s) + Cu2+(aq) → Zn2+(aq) + Cu(s)

Which statement about this reaction is correct?

A Copper ions are oxidised and their oxidation state changes.


B Copper ions are reduced because they lose electrons.
C Zinc atoms are oxidised and their oxidation state changes.
D Zinc atoms are reduced because they gain electrons.

15 In which reaction is the rate of reaction not affected by light?

A the conversion of carbon dioxide and water to glucose and oxygen in green plants
B the reaction of bromine with ethene
C the reaction of chlorine with methane
D the reduction of silver ions to silver

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


8

16 Calcium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to form bubbles of carbon dioxide.

At a higher temperature, the same reaction is faster.

Which row explains this observation?

number of molecules with


collision rate
sufficient energy to react

A increases more
B increases the same
C stays the same more
D stays the same the same

17 Ethanoic acid reacts with water to produce an acidic solution.

Which row describes the roles of ethanoic acid and water in this reaction?

ethanoic acid water

A accepts a proton donates a proton


B accepts an electron donates an electron
C donates a proton accepts a proton
D donates an electron accepts an electron

18 A solution of compound Z gives a light blue precipitate with aqueous ammonia. The precipitate
dissolves in an excess of ammonia.

A flame test is done on compound Z.

What is the colour of the flame?

A blue-green
B lilac
C red
D yellow

19 Carbon, copper, magnesium, sodium and sulfur can all form oxides.

How many of these elements form acidic oxides?

A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


9

20 Which method is used to make the salt copper(II) sulfate?

A dilute acid + alkali


B dilute acid + carbonate
C dilute acid + metal
D dilute acid + non-metal oxide

21 The Periodic Table lists all the known elements.

Elements are arranged in order of ....... 1 ....... number.

The melting points of Group I elements ....... 2 ....... down the group.

The melting points of Group VII elements ....... 3 ....... down the group.

Which words correctly complete gaps 1, 2 and 3?

1 2 3

A nucleon decrease increase


B nucleon increase decrease
C proton decrease increase
D proton increase decrease

22 Metal X reacts with non-metal Y to form an ionic compound with the formula X2Y.

Which statements are correct?

1 X is in Group I of the Periodic Table.


2 X is in Group II of the Periodic Table.
3 Y is in Group VI of the Periodic Table.
4 Y is in Group VII of the Periodic Table.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


10

23 Which statements about Group I and Group VII elements are correct?

1 In Group I, lithium is more reactive than potassium.


2 In Group VII, chlorine is more reactive than fluorine.

statement 1 statement 2

A  
B  
C  
D  

24 Which two properties are physical properties of all pure metals?

property 1 property 2

A brittle poor conductor of heat


B good conductor of electricity malleable
C good conductor of heat low melting point
D malleable low density

25 Aluminium is extracted from aluminium oxide using electrolysis.

Carbon dioxide is formed in this process.

Which equation shows the formation of carbon dioxide during the extraction of aluminium from
aluminium oxide by electrolysis?

A Al 2(CO3)3 → Al 2O3 + 3CO2

B Al 2O3 + 3CO → 2Al + 3CO2

C C + O2 → CO2

D C4+ + 2O2– → CO2

26 A sample of solid X was added to three different solutions to predict the position of X in the
reactivity series.

X(s) + FeSO4(aq) → no reaction

X(s) + 2HCl(aq) → XCl 2(aq) + H2(g)

X(s) + Zn(NO3)2(aq) → no reaction

Which other solution would react with solid X?

A CaSO4(aq) B CuSO4(aq) C MgSO4(aq) D Na2SO4(aq)

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


11

27 Which statement about the uses of aluminium, copper and iron is correct?

A Aluminium is used for aircraft manufacture because it has a high density.


B Aluminium is used for food containers because it is a good conductor of electricity.
C Copper is used for cooking utensils because it is a good conductor of heat.
D Stainless steel is used for car bodies because it corrodes easily.

28 Air is a mixture of gases.

The melting and boiling points of some gases present in clean, dry air are shown.

In the fractional distillation of liquid air, which gas boils first?

gas melting point / °C boiling point / °C

A argon –189 –186


B krypton –157 –153
C nitrogen –210 –196
D oxygen –219 –183

29 Water must be purified before it is suitable for use in the home.

Which processes are used to remove solid impurities and to kill bacteria?

to remove to kill
solid impurities bacteria

A chlorination chlorination
B chlorination filtration
C filtration chlorination
D filtration filtration

30 Which processes do not produce carbon dioxide?

1 heating limestone
2 burning gasoline in car engines
3 photosynthesis
4 production of nylon

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


12

31 Which pair of compounds would make an NPK fertiliser?

A ammonium sulfate and potassium phosphate


B calcium hydroxide and ammonium nitrate
C calcium phosphate and potassium chloride
D potassium nitrate and ammonium sulfate

32 Which pollutant gas is produced by the decomposition of vegetation?

A carbon monoxide
B methane
C nitrogen dioxide
D sulfur dioxide

33 The equation for the formation of sulfur trioxide from sulfur dioxide is shown.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Which combination of pressure and temperature gives the highest equilibrium yield of
sulfur trioxide?

pressure temperature

A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


13

34 The diagram shows the pH values of the soil in two parts of a garden, X and Y.

X Y
pH 7.0 pH 5.5

Lime is used to neutralise the soil in one part of the garden.

To which part of the garden should the lime be added and why?

part of the garden because lime is

A X acidic
B X basic
C Y acidic
D Y basic

35 Statement 1 Hydrogen is used as a fuel.

Statement 2 When hydrogen burns in the air to form water, heat energy is produced.

Which is correct?

A Both statements are correct and statement 2 explains statement 1.


B Both statements are correct but statement 2 does not explain statement 1.
C Statement 1 is correct but statement 2 is incorrect.
D Statement 2 is correct but statement 1 is incorrect.

36 Which row identifies compounds in the same homologous series?

chemical functional
properties group

A different different
B different same
C similar different
D similar same

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18 [Turn over


14

37 Three chemical reactions are shown.

1 catalytic addition of steam to ethene


2 combustion of ethanol
3 fermentation of glucose

In which of the reactions does the relative molecular mass of the carbon-containing compound
decrease?

A 1 and 2 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 3 only

38 How is ethanol produced by fermentation?

A using anaerobic conditions at 30 °C

B using anaerobic conditions at 450 °C

C using steam at 30 °C

D using steam at 450 °C

39 Which substances react together to form ethyl propanoate?

A ethanoic acid and propanol


B ethanol and propene
C ethene and propanol
D propanoic acid and ethanol

40 The structure of a chlorofluorocarbon polymer is shown.

CH3 Cl CH3 Cl

C C C C

H F H F

Which monomer is used to make this polymer?

A B C D
CH3 Cl H Cl CH3 F CH3 H

C C C C C C C C

F H CH3 F Cl H Cl F

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/F/M/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/F/M/18
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2199140551*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2018
 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 03_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 This question is about gases.

(a) The following substances are gases at room temperature.

letter A B C D E F G H
substance SO2 Ar CO Cl 2 NH3 CO2 CH4 C 3H 8

Identify, by letter:

(i) a gas which combines with water to form acid rain ....................................................... [1]

(ii) 
two gases which exist as diatomic molecules ............................................................... [2]

(iii) a gas which bleaches damp litmus paper ...................................................................... [1]

(iv) a gas which is used as an inert atmosphere in lamps ................................................... [1]

(v) 
two gases which are found in clean dry air ................................................................... [2]

(vi) 
two gases which are found in refinery gas. ................................................................... [2]

(b) NF3 has covalent bonds.

(i) What is a covalent bond?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
NF3.
Show outer shell electrons only.

F N F

[3]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


3

(c) Air is a mixture. Nitrogen and oxygen are the two most common gases in air.

(i) What is meant by the term mixture?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) State the percentage of oxygen, to the nearest whole number, in clean dry air.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Describe the steps in the industrial process which enables nitrogen and oxygen to be
separated from clean dry air.

Use scientific terms in your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [3]

(iv) Which physical property of nitrogen and oxygen allows them to be separated?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 20]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18 [Turn over


4

2 Sodium chloride is a typical ionic compound.

(a) The diagram shows part of a lattice of sodium chloride.

(i) Complete the diagram to show the ions present. Use ‘+’ for Na+ ions and ‘–’ for Cl – ions.
One ion has been completed for you.

[2]

(ii) How many electrons does a chloride ion have?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Identify an element which has atoms with the same number of electrons as a sodium ion.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride is an important industrial process.

(i) What is meant by the term electrolysis?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Name the products of the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................

3 ...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode.


Include state symbols.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


5

(c) Silver chloride can be made by reacting aqueous sodium chloride with aqueous silver nitrate.
The other product of the reaction is sodium nitrate. The chemical equation for the reaction is
shown.

NaCl (aq) + AgNO3(aq) AgCl (s) + NaNO3(aq)

A student attempted to make the maximum amount of sodium nitrate crystals. The process
involved three steps.

step 1 The student added aqueous sodium chloride to aqueous silver nitrate and stirred.
Neither reagent was in excess.

step 2 The student filtered the mixture. The student then washed the residue and added
the washings to the filtrate.

step 3 The student obtained sodium nitrate crystals from the filtrate.

(i) Describe what the student observed in step 1.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Why was the residue washed in step 2?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Give the names of the two processes which occurred in step 3.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iv) The student started with 20 cm3 of 0.20 mol / dm3 NaCl (aq).

●● Determine the amount of NaCl (aq) used.

 amount of NaCl (aq) used = .............................. mol

The yield of NaNO3 crystals was 90%.

●● Calculate the mass of NaNO3 crystals made.

 mass of NaNO3 crystals = .............................. g


[4]

(v) Write a chemical equation for the action of heat on sodium nitrate crystals.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 21]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18 [Turn over


6

3 Limestone rock is mainly calcium carbonate, CaCO3.

(a) The ‘limestone cycle’ is shown. Each step is numbered.

limestone step 1 lime


heat
calcium carbonate ...................................

CaCO3(s) ...................................

step 2
step 4
add
add CO2
limited water

limewater slaked lime

calcium hydroxide calcium hydroxide


step 3
Ca(OH)2(aq) add an excess Ca(OH)2(s)
of water

(i) Complete the box to give the chemical name and formula of lime. [2]

(ii) Which step involves a physical change?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) What type of reaction is step 1?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Suggest how step 2 could be reversed.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) Write a chemical equation for step 4.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(vi) Explain why step 4 is a neutralisation reaction. Refer to the substances reacting in your
answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(b) Dolomite is a similar rock to limestone. Dolomite contains magnesium carbonate, MgCO3.

Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium carbonate and dilute nitric acid.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


7

(c) Forsterite is another rock which contains a magnesium compound.

A sample of forsterite has the following composition by mass: Mg, 2.73 g; Si, 1.58 g; O, 3.60 g.

Calculate the empirical formula of forsterite.

 empirical formula = .............................. [2]

 [Total: 12]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18 [Turn over


8

4 Ammonia is an important chemical.

(a) Ammonia is a base.

(i) In chemistry, what is meant by the term base?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Write a word equation to show ammonia behaving as a base.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(b) Ammonia reacts with chlorine. The chemical equation is shown.

2NH3(g) + 3Cl 2(g) N2(g) + 6HCl (g)

(i) Calculate the volume of chlorine, measured at room temperature and pressure, needed to
react completely with 0.68 g of ammonia.

 volume of chlorine = .............................. cm3 [3]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


9

(ii) The chemical equation can be represented as shown.

2 H N H + 3 Cl Cl N N + 6 H Cl

Use the bond energies in the table to determine the energy change, ΔH, for the reaction
between ammonia and chlorine.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

N–H 390
Cl –Cl 240
N≡N 945
H–Cl 430

●● energy needed to break bonds

 .............................. kJ

●● energy released when bonds are formed

 .............................. kJ

●● energy change, ΔH, for the reaction between ammonia and chlorine

 .............................. kJ
[3]

(iii) Is the reaction endothermic or exothermic? Explain your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18 [Turn over


10

(c) Ammonia reacts with oxygen at high temperatures in the presence of a suitable catalyst to
form nitric oxide, NO.

4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)

(i) Explain how this chemical equation shows ammonia acting as a reducing agent.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest a suitable catalyst for the reaction from the list of metals. Give a reason for your
answer.

aluminium calcium platinum potassium sodium

suitable catalyst ...................................................................................................................

reason ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

 [Total: 13]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


11

5 Alcohols are a ‘family’ of organic molecules which have the same general formula.

(a) What is the name given to any ‘family’ of organic molecules which have the same general
formula and similar chemical properties?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Give the general formula of alcohols.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Propan-1-ol can be made from propene.

(i) Name the reagent and give the conditions needed to convert propene into propan-1-ol.

reagent ................................................................................................................................

conditions ............................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for the complete combustion of propan-1-ol.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(d) A simple sugar can be represented as shown.

H O O H

Simple sugars can be polymerised to make more complex carbohydrates.

(i) Complete the diagram to show part of a carbohydrate polymer made from the simple
sugar shown.

[2]

(ii) Name the chemical process which occurs when a carbohydrate polymer is broken down
into simple sugars.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) What conditions are needed for this process to occur?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18 [Turn over


12

(e) Chromatography can be used to identify simple sugars in a mixture.

A student analysed a mixture of simple sugars by chromatography. All the simple sugars in the
mixture were colourless.

(i) What is the name given to the type of substance used to identify the positions of the simple
sugars on the chromatogram?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) The student calculated the Rf value of a spot on the chromatogram.

Complete the expression for the Rf value of the spot.

Rf =

[1]

(iii) How could a student identify a simple sugar from its Rf value?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Sometimes not all the substances in a mixture can be identified from the chromatogram
produced.

Explain why this may happen.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 14]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2018
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/F/M/18
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5434778494*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2018
 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 03_0620_62/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 A student used paper chromatography to separate a mixture of coloured dyes. The diagram shows
the apparatus used.

clips
rod
paper

mixture of
coloured dyes
baseline

(a) (i) Draw a line on the diagram to show the level of the solvent. [1]

(ii) Suggest a suitable solvent that could be used.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) What could be used to put the mixture of coloured dyes onto the paper?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) The clips hold the paper in position.

Why is this important for the chromatography experiment?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


3

The diagram shows the chromatogram obtained from four dyes, A, B, C and D.

solvent front

baseline
A B C D

(d) Give one conclusion that can be drawn about dye B.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) Suggest why dye C remained on the baseline.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) 
Rf values are used to identify compounds.

distance travelled by the compound


Rf =
distance travelled by the solvent

Calculate the Rf value of dye A.

 Rf = .............................. [2]

 [Total: 8]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18 [Turn over


4

2 A student investigated the reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid and an aqueous solution of
sodium carbonate labelled solution L.

Three experiments were done.


Experiment 1

●  measuring cylinder was used to pour 25 cm3 of solution L into a conical flask.
A
● Ten drops of thymolphthalein indicator were added to the conical flask.
● A burette was filled up to the 0.0 cm3 mark with dilute hydrochloric acid.
● Dilute hydrochloric acid was added from the burette to the conical flask until the solution just
changed to colourless at the end-point of the titration.

(a) Use the burette diagram to record the final burette reading in the table and complete the table.

11

12

13

final burette reading

Experiment 1

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3 0.0

difference / cm3
[1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


5


Experiment 2

●  en drops of methyl orange indicator were added to the solution in the conical flask from
T
Experiment 1.
● Dilute hydrochloric acid was added from the burette to the conical flask until the solution just
changed colour.

(b) Use the burette diagram to record the final burette reading in the table and complete the table.

22

23

24

final burette reading

Experiment 2

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3 12.0

difference / cm3
[1]


Experiment 3

● The conical flask was emptied and rinsed with distilled water.
●  xperiment 1 was repeated using methyl orange indicator instead of thymolphthalein indicator
E
and adding dilute hydrochloric acid from the burette to the conical flask until the solution just
changed colour.

(c) Use the burette diagrams to record the burette readings in the table and complete the table.

0 23

1 24

2 25

initial burette reading final burette reading

Experiment 3

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

difference / cm3
[3]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18 [Turn over


6

(d) What colour change was observed in the conical flask in Experiment 3?

from ................................................................... to ....................................................................


[1]

(e) Why was the conical flask emptied and rinsed with distilled water at the start of Experiment 3?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Complete the sentence.

Experiment .......... needed the largest volume of dilute hydrochloric acid to change the colour
of the indicator. [1]

(g) Give the name of a more accurate piece of apparatus for measuring the volume of solution L.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(h) 
What would be the effect on the results if solution L were warmed before adding the
dilute hydrochloric acid? Give a reason for your answer.

effect on the results ....................................................................................................................

reason .........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(i) (i) Determine the simplest whole number ratio of volumes of dilute hydrochloric acid used in
Experiments 1 and 3.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest why the volumes of dilute hydrochloric acid used in Experiments 1 and 3 are
different.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(j) Suggest why Universal Indicator cannot be used in these experiments.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(k) Suggest how the reliability of the results could be checked.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


7

3 Two substances, solution M and solid N, were analysed. Solution M was aqueous iron(III) chloride.
Tests were done on the substances.

Complete the expected observations.

tests on solution M

(a) Describe the appearance of solution M.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

Solution M was divided into three equal portions in three test-tubes.

(b) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added to the first portion of solution M.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate were added to the second portion of solution M.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) (i) Drops of aqueous sodium hydroxide were added to the third portion of solution M until a
change was seen.

observations .................................................................................................................. [2]

(ii) An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was then added to the mixture.

observations .................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18 [Turn over


8

tests on solid N


Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solid N observations

The appearance of solid N was studied. green powder

test 1

Solid N was heated. solid turned black

The gas produced was tested. limewater turned milky

test 2

A flame test was done on solid N. blue-green colour

(e) Name the gas produced in test 1.

���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� [1]

(f) Identify solid N.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


9

4 Magnesium reacts with dilute sulfuric acid at room temperature to form hydrogen gas.

Plan an experiment to find the rate of reaction between magnesium ribbon and dilute sulfuric acid.

In your answer:


● include a diagram
● indicate how you could use the results obtained to find the rate of reaction.

You are provided with common laboratory apparatus, magnesium ribbon and dilute sulfuric acid.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/F/M/18


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4970364461*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2019
 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB19 03_0620_42/4RP
© UCLES 2019 [Turn over
2

1 Period 3 of the Periodic Table is shown.

sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon

Answer the following questions using only these elements.


Each element may be used once, more than once or not at all.

State which element:

(a) is a gas at room temperature and pressure

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) forms a basic oxide with a formula of the form X2O

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) is made of atoms which have a full outer shell of electrons

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) forms an oxide which causes acid rain

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) is extracted from bauxite

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) forms an oxide which has a macromolecular structure

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(g) consists of diatomic molecules.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 7]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


3

2 (a) The table gives information about some atoms or ions, A, B and C.

Complete the table.

number of number of electronic


charge
protons electrons structure

A 11 10 2,8

B 18 0

C 10 2,8 –1
[4]

(b) (i) Carbon is an element.

Define the term element.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

6C, 6C and 6C are isotopes of carbon.


12 13 14
(ii) 

Complete the table.

number of protons number of neutrons

6C
12

6C
13

6C
14

[2]

 [Total: 7]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


4

3 Fluorine is a Group VII element. Fluorine forms compounds with metals and non-metals.

(a) Predict the physical state of fluorine at room temperature and pressure.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Fluorine exists as diatomic molecules.

Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of


fluorine. Show outer shell electrons only.

F F

[2]

(c) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between sodium and fluorine.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Explain why chlorine does not react with aqueous sodium fluoride.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


5

 etrafluoromethane and lead(II) fluoride are fluorides of Group IV elements. Some properties


(e) T
of tetrafluoromethane and lead(II) fluoride are shown in the table.

property tetrafluoromethane lead(II) fluoride


formula CF4
melting point / °C –184 855
boiling point / °C –127 1290
conduction of electricity when solid non-conductor non-conductor
conduction of electricity when molten non-conductor good conductor

(i) What is the formula of lead(II) fluoride?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) What type of bonding is present between the atoms in tetrafluoromethane?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) What type of structure does solid lead(II) fluoride have?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 xplain, in terms of attractive forces between particles, why lead(II) fluoride has a much
(iv) E
higher melting point than tetrafluoromethane.

In your answer refer to the types of attractive forces between particles and their relative
strengths.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [3]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


6

(f) T etrafluoroethene is an unsaturated compound with the formula C2F4.


Tetrafluoroethene is the monomer used to make the polymer poly(tetrafluoroethene).

(i) What is meant by the term unsaturated ?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Describe a test to show that tetrafluoroethene is unsaturated.

test........................................................................................................................................

observations.........................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) D
 raw the structure of a molecule of tetrafluoroethene. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.

[1]

(iv) Tetrafluoroethene can be polymerised to form poly(tetrafluoroethene).

Draw one repeat unit of poly(tetrafluoroethene). Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

[2]

(v) Deduce the empirical formula of:

tetrafluoroethene .................................................................................................................

poly(tetrafluoroethene). .......................................................................................................
[2]

 [Total: 20]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


7

4 This question is about ethanoic acid, CH3COOH.

(a) Ethanoic acid is manufactured from methanol and carbon monoxide.

CH3OH(g) + CO(g) CH3COOH(g)

The process is done at 200 °C and 30 atmospheres pressure.


The forward reaction is exothermic.

Complete the table using only the words increases, decreases or no change.

effect on the rate of effect on the equilibrium


the forward reaction yield of CH3COOH(g)

adding a catalyst no change

increasing the temperature

decreasing the pressure decreases


[4]

(b) How would you show that an aqueous solution of ethanoic acid is an acid without using an
indicator or measuring the pH?

State the reagent you would use and give the expected observations. Write a chemical equation
for the reaction that you describe.

●● reagent

.....................................................................................................................................................

●● expected observations

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

●● chemical equation

.....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


8

(c) Ethanoic acid is a weak acid.

(i) 
What is meant by the term acid ?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Why is ethanoic acid described as weak ?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) Ethanoic acid reacts with methanol to form an ester.

(i) State two conditions required for this reaction.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Draw the structure of the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with methanol. Show all
of the atoms and all of the bonds. Name the ester.

structure

name ....................................................................................................................................
[3]

(iii) Name an ester which is a structural isomer of the ester in (d)(ii).

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 15]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


9

5 Titanium is extracted from an ore called rutile. Rutile is an impure form of titanium(IV) oxide, TiO2.

(a) R
 utile is mixed with coke and heated in a furnace through which chlorine gas is passed. The
product is gaseous titanium(IV) chloride, TiCl 4.

TiO2(s) + 2C(s) + 2Cl 2(g) TiCl 4(g) + 2CO(g)

 he gaseous titanium(IV) chloride produced is condensed into the liquid state. The


T
titanium(IV) chloride is then separated from liquid impurities.

 uggest the name of the process by which liquid titanium(IV) chloride could be separated
(i) S
from the liquid impurities.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Carbon monoxide, CO(g), is also produced in the reaction.

Why should carbon monoxide not be released into the atmosphere?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Calculate the volume of chlorine gas, Cl 2(g), at room temperature and pressure, that reacts
completely with 400 g of TiO2(s) using the following steps.

TiO2(s) + 2Cl 2(g) + 2C(s) TiCl 4(g) + 2CO(g)

●● Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of TiO2.

 Mr of TiO2 = ..............................

●● Calculate the number of moles in 400 g of TiO2.

 .............................. mol

●● Determine the number of moles of Cl 2 that react with 400 g of TiO2.

 moles of Cl 2 = .............................. mol

●● Calculate the volume of Cl 2 that reacts with 400 g of TiO2.

 volume of Cl 2 = .............................. dm3


[4]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


10

 itanium(IV) chloride, TiCl 4, is heated with an excess of magnesium, in an atmosphere of


(c) T
argon.

(i) Balance the chemical equation for the reaction.

TiCl 4 + ..... Mg Ti + ..... MgCl 2


[1]

(ii) Titanium(IV) chloride can be reacted with sodium instead of magnesium.

 he reaction between titanium(IV) chloride and sodium is similar to the reaction between


T
titanium(IV) chloride and magnesium.

Write a chemical equation for the reaction between titanium(IV) chloride and sodium.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 uggest why the reaction between titanium(IV) chloride and magnesium is done in an


(iii) S
atmosphere of argon and not in air.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 fter titanium(IV) chloride is heated with magnesium, the unreacted magnesium is removed


(d) A
by adding an excess of dilute hydrochloric acid to the mixture.

The dilute hydrochloric acid also dissolves the magnesium chloride.


The dilute hydrochloric acid does not react with the titanium or dissolve it.

(i) Give two observations and write a chemical equation for the reaction that occurs when
dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with magnesium.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................

chemical equation ................................................................................................................


[3]

(ii) Name the process that is used to separate the titanium from the mixture after all the
magnesium has been removed.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Titanium does not react with the dilute hydrochloric acid or dissolve in it.

Suggest why titanium does not react with dilute hydrochloric acid.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


11

(e) M
 agnesium cannot be produced by electrolysis of aqueous magnesium chloride using inert
electrodes.

(i) N
 ame the product formed at the negative electrode (cathode) during the electrolysis of
aqueous magnesium chloride.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest how magnesium can be produced from magnesium chloride by electrolysis.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


12

6 This question is about transition elements.

(a) Transition elements are harder and stronger than Group I elements.

Describe two other differences in physical properties between transition elements and Group I
elements.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) State one physical property of transition elements that is similar to Group I elements.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) State two chemical properties of transition elements.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(d) Cobalt is a transition element. Anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride is used to test for water.

State the colour change that occurs when water is added to anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride.

from ................................................................... to ...................................................................


[2]

(e) Iron is a transition element.

(i) 
Which two substances react with iron to form rust?

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Which metal is used to galvanise iron?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


13

(f) T
 he hull of a ship is made from steel (mainly iron). Metal blocks are placed on the ship’s hull to
prevent rusting.

water water

ship’s hull metal


block

Use your knowledge of the reactivity series to explain why:

●●  agnesium is suitable to use as the metal blocks


m
●● copper is not suitable to use as the metal blocks.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(g) Rust contains iron(III) oxide.

Phosphoric acid, H3PO4, can be used to remove rust from an iron object and prevent further
rusting.

 rite a chemical equation for the reaction between iron(III) oxide and phosphoric acid to
(i) W
form iron(III) phosphate and water.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Iron(III) phosphate is an insoluble salt.

Suggest how the formation of iron(III) phosphate prevents further rusting.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 15]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2019
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/F/M/19
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3799843157*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical February/March 2019
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB19 03_0620_62/4RP
© UCLES 2019 [Turn over
2

1 A chemist heated solid zinc chloride until it became molten. The apparatus shown was then used
to pass electricity through the molten zinc chloride using inert electrodes.

power
supply

+ –

molten zinc chloride

A silver-coloured solid was formed at the negative electrode (cathode).

(a) Name the process of breaking down a substance using electricity.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A Bunsen burner was used to heat the zinc chloride.

Describe how a Bunsen burner is adjusted to give a very hot flame.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Suggest and explain the expected observation at the positive electrode (anode).

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Suggest why iron electrodes cannot be used in this experiment.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


3

(e) (i) 
What difference would the chemist observe at the negative electrode if aqueous
zinc chloride were used, rather than molten zinc chloride?
Explain you answer.

difference .............................................................................................................................

explanation ..........................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) When electricity is used to break down concentrated aqueous zinc chloride, chlorine is
produced at the positive electrode.

Describe a test for chlorine.

test .......................................................................................................................................

observations ........................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) The bottle of zinc chloride is labelled corrosive.

State one safety precaution that should be taken when using zinc chloride.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 10]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19 [Turn over


4

2 
A student investigated the reaction between two different solutions, A and B, of aqueous
potassium manganate(VII) and solution C.

Three experiments were done.

Experiment 1

●●  burette was filled with solution A. The initial burette reading was recorded.
A
●● A measuring cylinder was used to pour 25 cm3 of solution C into a conical flask.
●● Solution  A was added to the conical flask until the mixture just turned pink. The final burette
reading was recorded.
●● About 2  cm3 of the contents of the conical flask was poured into a test‑tube to use in Experiment 3.
●● The rest of the contents of the conical flask was poured away. The conical flask was rinsed
with distilled water.

(a) Use the burette diagrams to record the burette readings in the table and complete the table.

1 15

2 16

3 17

initial burette reading final burette reading

Experiment 1

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

volume used / cm3
[2]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


5

Experiment 2

●●  he contents of the burette used in Experiment 1 were poured away and the burette was
T
rinsed with distilled water.
●● The burette was then rinsed with solution B.
●● Experiment 1 was repeated using solution B instead of solution A.

(b) Use the burette diagrams to record the burette readings in the table and complete the table.

1 31

2 32

3 33

initial burette reading final burette reading

Experiment 2

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

volume used / cm3
[2]

Which solution of potassium manganate(VII), solution A or solution B, is the more


(c) (i) 
concentrated?
Explain your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) How many times more concentrated is this solution of potassium manganate(VII)?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19 [Turn over


6

(d) (i) Predict the volume of solution B that would be used if Experiment 2 were repeated using
50 cm3 of solution C.
Explain your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Suggest a practical problem that using 50 cm3 of solution C could cause. How could this
problem be solved?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(e) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of using a measuring cylinder rather than a pipette
for solution C.

advantage of using a measuring cylinder ...................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

disadvantage of using a measuring cylinder ..............................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................
[2]


Experiment 3

The results from Experiment 3 are shown in the table.

tests observations

Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to green precipitate formed


about 2 cm3 of solution C.

Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the red-brown precipitate formed


reaction mixture saved from Experiment 1.

(f) What conclusions can be drawn about solution C from Experiment 3?

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

 [Total: 15]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


7

3 Two substances, solution D and solid E, were analysed. Solution D was dilute sulfuric acid.
Tests were done on the substances.

tests on solution D

Complete the expected observations.

Solution  D was divided into four equal portions in four test-tubes.

(a) The pH of the first portion of solution D was tested.

 pH = .............................. [1]

(b) A strip of magnesium ribbon was added to the second portion of solution D. The gas produced
was tested.

observations ...............................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added to the third portion of solution D.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate were added to the fourth portion of solution D.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19 [Turn over


8

tests on solid E

Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solid E observations

The appearance of solid E was studied. white solid

test 1

Solid  E was heated gently and then more white solid residue
strongly.

Distilled water was added to the residue and pH = 10


the pH of the mixture was tested.

test 2

Dilute hydrochloric acid was added to solid E. rapid effervescence

The gas produced was tested. limewater turned milky

Distilled water was added to the solution and


the mixture was shaken.

An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was white precipitate formed which was insoluble in excess
added to the mixture.

(e) Identify the gas produced in test 2.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) 
What conclusions can you draw about solid E?

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

 [Total: 9]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


9

4 The rate of reaction between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid can be followed by measuring
the volume of hydrogen produced.

Plan an experiment to investigate the effect of decreasing the temperature on the rate of this
reaction by measuring the volume of hydrogen produced.

You are provided with magnesium ribbon, dilute hydrochloric acid and common laboratory
apparatus.
You are advised to draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use in the space provided.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/F/M/19


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*6390889396*

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 May/June 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB14 06_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


3

1 The diagram shows part of the Periodic Table. Only some of the elements are shown.

Li C N O

Na Al

K Fe Co Ni Cu Zn

Rb

Cs Pb

(a) Answer the following questions using only the elements shown in the diagram.
Each element may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(i) Which element has a giant covalent structure? ............................................................ [1]

(ii) Which element has the highest relative atomic mass? ................................................. [1]

(iii) Which two elements are formed when molten aluminium oxide is electrolysed?

...................... and ...................... [1]

(iv) Which element in Group I reacts most rapidly with water? ........................................... [1]

(v) Which element oxidises in the presence of water to form rust? ................................... [1]

(vi) Which element burns in oxygen to form water? ........................................................... [1]

(b) Rubidium reacts with oxygen to form rubidium oxide, Rb2O.


Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

....Rb + ...... → 2Rb2O


[2]

(c) Lead compounds are atmospheric pollutants.


State one adverse effect of lead compounds on health.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


4

2 Carbon dioxide can be prepared in the laboratory using the apparatus shown below.

B
carbon
dioxide

hydrochloric acid

marble chips
(calcium carbonate)

(a) State the names of the pieces of apparatus labelled A and B.

A ................................................................................................................................................

B ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Complete the word equation for this reaction.

.....................
calcium hydrochloric carbon
+ → + + .....................
carbonate acid dioxide
.....................
[2]

(c) Carbon dioxide is slightly soluble in water.


What effect will this have on the volume of carbon dioxide collected?
Tick one box.

The volume is lower than expected.

The volume is higher than expected.

The volume is the same as expected.

No carbon dioxide is collected.


[1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


5

(d) A burning candle is lowered into a beaker of carbon dioxide.

beaker

candle

(i) The flame goes out.


Explain why the flame goes out.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) After 20 seconds, the candle is removed and relit.


It is then lowered into the same beaker again.
The flame goes out again.
What does this tell you about the density of carbon dioxide compared to air?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) After 40 minutes, the candle is removed and relit.


It is then lowered into the same beaker again.
The candle stays alight.
Explain why the candle stays alight.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


6

3 River water contains a variety of ions and gases, and insoluble materials such as soil particles.

(a) Describe how you could remove the insoluble materials from a sample of river water.
Include a labelled diagram.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) The table shows the ions present in a sample of river water.

concentration
name of ion formula of ion
in mg / dm3

calcium Ca2+ 0.6


chloride Cl – 14.0
hydrogen carbonate HCO3– 1.5
iron(III) Fe3+ 0.5
magnesium Mg2+ 1.0
potassium K+ 3.0
sodium Na+ 11.0
SO42– 0.4

(i) Which ion with a charge of 2+ is present in the highest concentration?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the name of the ion with the formula SO42–.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


7

(iii) Calculate the total mass of ions present in 1 dm3 of river water.

.................. mg [1]

(iv) Use your answer to part (iii) to calculate the total mass of ions in 50 cm3 of river water.

.................. mg [1]

(v) A student evaporated the sample of river water to leave a solid containing a number of
different compounds.
Use the information in the table to suggest the name of the compound present in the
greatest amount.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


8

(c) The table shows the solubility of oxygen in river water at different temperatures.

temperature / °C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
solubility in mg / dm3 11.0 8.8 7.2 6.0 4.9 4.2 3.6

(i) On the axes below, plot a graph to show how the solubility of oxygen changes with
temperature. Draw a curve of best fit through the points.

12

10

8
solubility
in mg / dm3

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

temperature / °C
[3]

(ii) Deduce the solubility of oxygen in river water at 25 °C.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State the approximate percentage of oxygen in the air.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


9

4 The alkanes are a homologous series of hydrocarbons.

(a) Name another homologous series of hydrocarbons.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The graph below shows how the melting points of the first eight alkanes vary with the number
of carbon atoms.

–50
melting
point / °C
–100

–150

–200
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
number of carbon atoms

(i) Describe how the melting points of these alkanes vary with the number of carbon atoms.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) On the graph above, continue the line to show the melting points of the hydrocarbons
having 9 and 10 carbon atoms. [2]

(c) The first member of the alkane homologous series is methane.

(i) State one source of the methane in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State one adverse effect of methane in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Complete the symbol equation to show the complete combustion of methane.

CH4 + ....O2 → ........ + 2H2O


[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


10

5 Iron from a blast furnace contains carbon, sulfur, silicon and phosphorus as impurities.

(a) Iron is converted into steel in a basic oxygen converter.


The impurities undergo oxidation.
What is meant by the term oxidation?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Carbon is oxidised to carbon dioxide. Sulfur is oxidised to sulfur dioxide.


Explain why these oxides are easily removed from the molten iron.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Phosphorus is converted to phosphorus(V) oxide.

(i) Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

.....P + 5O2 → 2P2O5


[1]

(ii) Is phosphorus(V) oxide an acidic or basic oxide?


Give a reason for your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) Phosphorus(V) oxide is a solid.


Explain how this oxide is removed from the molten iron.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(e) Steel is an alloy.

(i) State one use of:

mild steel, ...........................................................................................................................

stainless steel. ....................................................................................................................


[2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


11

(ii) Which diagram, A, B, C or D, best represents an alloy?


Put a ring around the correct answer.

A B C D
[1]

(f) The table shows the composition of some different brasses.

composition of the brass strength


% zinc % copper / 108 Pa

10 90 2.6
20 80 3.0
30 70 3.3
40 60 3.6

How does the composition of brass affect its strength?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(g) A student dissolved a sample of brass in concentrated nitric acid.


Nitrogen dioxide, NO2, was released.

Cu + 4HNO3 → Cu(NO3)2 + 2NO2 + 2H2O

(i) Write a word equation for this reaction.

[2]

(ii) The student added aqueous ammonia to the solution formed until the ammonia was in
excess.
Describe what the student would observe.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) State one source of the nitrogen dioxide in the atmosphere.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


12

6 In the 1860s, John Newlands listed the elements in order of increasing atomic mass. Part of his
table is shown.

H Li Be B C N O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
F Na Mg Al Si P S
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Cl K Ca Cr Ti Mn Fe
15 16 17 18 19 20 21

(a) (i) Describe the differences between Newlands’ table and the Periodic Table we use today.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) What evidence is there, from Newlands’ table, that some elements with similar properties
are grouped together?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The table below shows some properties of some of the halogens.

melting point boiling point


halogen colour
/ °C / °C

chlorine –101 –7 yellow-green


bromine –7 red-brown
iodine +114 +184 grey-black
astatine +302 +337

Deduce:

the colour of astatine, ................................................................................................................

the boiling point of bromine, ......................................................................................................

the state of iodine at 190 °C. ......................................................................................................


[3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


13

(c) Aqueous chlorine reacts with aqueous potassium bromide.

Cl 2 + 2KBr → Br2 + 2KCl

(i) Describe the colour change you would observe in this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the name of the salt formed in this reaction.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why aqueous bromine does not react with aqueous potassium chloride.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) The halogens exist as diatomic molecules.


What is meant by the term diatomic?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


14

7 Ethanol is an alcohol.

(a) Complete the structure of ethanol showing all atoms and bonds.

–C–O–H

[1]

(b) State the name of the products formed when ethanol undergoes incomplete combustion.

................................................................... and ................................................................... [2]

(c) Ethanol can be manufactured by fermentation or by the hydration of ethene.

(i) Complete the word equation for the manufacture of ethanol from ethene.

ethene + ........................ → ethanol


[1]

(ii) What conditions are needed for the manufacture of ethanol from ethene?
Tick two boxes.

temperature above 100 °C

room temperature

presence of inorganic catalyst

presence of yeast

presence of hydrogen
[2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14


15

(iii) When ethanol is prepared by fermentation, the fermentation mixture produced contains
ethanol and water.
The boiling point of ethanol is 78 °C.
Describe how fractional distillation can be used to separate ethanol from water.
In your answer, refer to:

● the apparatus used,


● changes in state,
● differences in boiling points.

You may use a diagram.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/M/J/14 [Turn over


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/22/M/J/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 1 5 8 5 3 5 0 2 4 7 *

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

DC (CW) 105195/3
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 The structures of six compounds containing oxygen are shown below.

A B C

O
O2− Ca2+ O2− Ca2+ NH4+ NH4+ NH4+
Si
O Si NO3− NO3− NO3−
2+ 2− 2+ 2−
Ca O Ca O O O
NH4+ NH4+ NH4+
Si Si O
O2− Ca2+ O2− Ca2+ NO3− NO3− NO3−
O O Si
Si O
O
O Si Si
O
Si

D E F

O O
H O
O C O Xe S
O O H O O
O

(a) Answer the following questions about these compounds. Each compound, A, B, C, D, E or F,
may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(i) Which compound is a compound of a noble gas? ....................[1]

(ii) Which compound can be used as a fertiliser? ....................[1]

(iii) Which compound can be used to neutralise acidic soil? ....................[1]

(iv) Which compound is a greenhouse gas? ....................[1]

(v) Which two compounds are ionic? .................... and ....................[1]

(vi) Which two compounds react to form calcium sulfate? .................... and ....................[1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


3

(b) Complete the symbol equation for the reaction of compound A with hydrochloric acid.

CaO + ......HCl CaCl2 + ............. [2]

(c) Complete the following sentence about compounds using words from the list below.

atoms combined mixtures

molecules separated unreactive

A compound is a substance containing two or more different .................................. which are

chemically .................................. . [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over


4

2 An aqueous solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate is added to an aqueous solution of citric acid.
The mixture is stirred. The temperature is measured before and after the addition.

20 °C

citric acid sodium hydrogen


20 °C carbonate 11 °C

(a) Explain how this experiment shows that the reaction is endothermic.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(b) Citric acid reacts with sodium hydroxide to form the soluble salt sodium citrate.

Describe how you could prepare pure dry crystals of sodium citrate from citric acid and
sodium hydroxide.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

(c) Citric acid can be made by fermentation.

Ethanol can also be made by fermentation.

Which of the following are required to make ethanol by fermentation?

Tick two boxes.

enzymes from yeast

temperature above 100 °C

high pressure

concentrated sulfuric acid

glucose
[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


5

(d) Complete the structure of ethanol to show all atoms and all bonds.

O H

[1]

(e) Ethanol can be made from ethene.

Complete the following sentence about the formation of ethanol from ethene using words
from the list below.

carbonate catalyst

hydrogen proton steam

Ethanol can be made by reacting ethene with .................................. in the presence of

a .................................. . [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over


6

3 When sodium hydrogen carbonate is heated at 60 °C, carbon dioxide is given off.

(a) (i) Complete the equation for this reaction.

......NaHCO3 Na2CO3 + CO2 + ............. [2]

(ii) What type of chemical reaction is this?

Tick one box.

addition

neutralisation

oxidation

thermal decomposition
[1]

(b) An aqueous solution of sodium hydrogen carbonate is slightly alkaline.

Which one of the following pH values is slightly alkaline?

Put a ring around the correct answer.

pH 2 pH 7 pH 8 pH 13 [1]

(c) Baking powder contains sodium hydrogen carbonate and crystals of a weak acid.

When water is added, the acid reacts with the sodium hydrogen carbonate.

(i) Complete the general equation for the reaction of an acid with a carbonate.

acid + carbonate carbon dioxide + ........................... + ........................... [2]

(ii) The diagram below shows bread baked with and without the addition of baking powder.
All other conditions were kept the same.

bread baked bread baked


without baking powder with baking powder

Why is the bread baked with baking powder bigger?

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) Explain why the sodium hydrogen carbonate used in breadmaking must be pure.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


7

(d) The diagram shows the arrangement of carbon dioxide molecules at –25 °C and
100 atmospheres pressure.

represents a
molecule of
carbon dioxide

What is the state of carbon dioxide under these conditions?

Use the kinetic particle theory and the information in the diagram to explain your answer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

[Total: 11]

4 A student investigated the rate of reaction of zinc with dilute hydrochloric acid.

Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g)

(a) Complete the labelling of the apparatus by filling in the two boxes.

thermometer

dilute
hydrochloric acid
water bath
at 20 °C zinc
[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over


8

(b) The student carried out the reaction at 20 °C using small pieces of zinc. She measured the
volume of hydrogen given off as the reaction proceeded.

60

50

40

volume of
30
hydrogen / cm3

20

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time / min

(i) Describe how the volume of hydrogen changes with time.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) At what time did the reaction stop?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) What volume of gas was produced over the first two minutes of the reaction?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iv) On the graph above draw a line to show how the volume of hydrogen changes when the
reaction was carried out at 30 °C. All other conditions remain the same. [2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


9

(c) How does the rate of reaction change when larger pieces of zinc are used?

All other conditions remain the same.

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

(d) Molten zinc chloride can be electrolysed using graphite electrodes.

(i) State the names of the product formed at:

the anode ..........................................................................................................................

the cathode. .......................................................................................................................


[2]

(ii) Graphite conducts electricity. Give one other reason why graphite electrodes are used.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over


10

5 Cinnamic acid is found in plants called balsams.

The structure of cinnamic acid is shown below.

H H

C C H H O

H C C C C C

C C O H

H H

(a) On the structure of cinnamic acid above, put a ring around the carboxylic acid functional
group. [1]

(b) Cinnamic acid is an unsaturated compound.

(i) What is the meaning of the term unsaturated ?

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) Describe a test for an unsaturated compound.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(c) Cinnamic acid reacts with sodium hydroxide to form styrene.

C6H5CH=CHCOOH + 2NaOH C6H5CH=CH2 + Na2CO3 + H2O

Complete the word equation for this reaction.


.............................
cinnamic sodium
+ styrene + + .............................
acid hydroxide .............................
[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


11

(d) Styrene is used to make the polymer poly(styrene).

Poly(ethene) is also a polymer.

Describe how poly(ethene) is made.

In your answer include the words:

• addition
• ethene
• monomer
• polymerisation

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

(e) Balsam flowers contain a mixture of pigments.

(i) Describe how you could obtain a solution of this mixture of pigments from balsam flowers.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[3]

(ii) A student uses chromatography to separate the pigments in balsam flowers. He puts the
pigment mixture on a sheet of chromatography paper as well as 5 spots of pure pigments
A, B, C, D and E.

The diagram below shows the results after chromatography.

pigments A B C D E
from balsam
flowers

Which of the pigments A, B, C, D and E are present in balsam flowers?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over


12

6 The table shows some properties of aluminium, copper, iron and sodium.

metal electrical density in melting strength colour


conductivity g / cm3 point / °C
aluminium very good 2.70 660 fairly strong silver
copper very good 8.92 1083 very strong pink-brown
iron good 7.86 1535 very strong silver
sodium good 0.97 98 weak silver

(a) Which two metals in the table are transition elements? Explain your answer by referring to a
specific property of transition elements given in the table.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[2]

(b) Use the information in the table to suggest

(i) why overhead electricity cables are made from aluminium with a steel core,

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[2]

(ii) one reason why sodium is not used for electricity cables.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) Cobalt chloride is a transition element compound.

Calcium chloride is a compound of a Group II metal.

Describe one difference between cobalt chloride and calcium chloride.

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


13

(d) The table below shows some observations about the reaction of four metals with water or
steam.

metal observations
aluminium reacts with steam when strongly heated
lithium reacts rapidly with cold water
magnesium reacts very slowly with cold water but rapidly with steam
silver does not react with steam

Place these metals in order of their reactivity.

least reactive most reactive

[1]

(e) When iron is heated with steam, hydrogen is given off.

3Fe + 4H2O Fe3O4 + 4H2

(i) What does the sign mean?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(ii) Describe a test for hydrogen.

test ....................................................................................................................................

result .................................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) Steel is an alloy of iron. Write about alloys of iron.

In your answer refer to:

• the meaning of the term alloy,


• why alloys are used instead of pure iron,
• an example of the use of an alloy of iron.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[4]

[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15 [Turn over
14

7 A teacher placed a few drops of liquid bromine in the bottom of a test-tube containing a solvent.

After 10 minutes, the brown colour of the bromine had spread a little way through the solvent.

After 2 hours, the brown colour had spread throughout the solvent.

solvent

liquid
bromine

at the after after


start 10 minutes 2 hours

(a) Use the kinetic particle theory to explain these observations.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................................[3]

(b) Bromine is a halogen in Group VII.

The properties of some halogens are given in the table below.

halogen melting boiling point / °C density at electron


point / °C boiling point in arrangement of
g / cm3 halogen atom
fluorine –220 –188 1.51 2,7
chlorine –101 –35 1.56 2,8,7
bromine –7 +59 2,8,18,7
iodine +114 +184 4.93 2,8,18,18,7

Use the information in the table to:

(i) Deduce the state of fluorine at –200 °C.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


15

(ii) Describe how the melting point changes down Group VII.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iii) Estimate the density of bromine.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(iv) Deduce the number of completely filled electron shells in an atom of chlorine.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) Aqueous bromine reacts with aqueous potassium iodide to form iodine and potassium
bromide.

(i) Complete the equation for this reaction.

Br2 + 2KI ............. + 2KBr


[1]

(ii) Explain why aqueous bromine does not react with an aqueous solution of potassium
chloride.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(d) Bromine reacts with fluorine to form bromine trifluoride, BrF3.

Calculate the relative molecular mass of bromine trifluoride.

Show all your working.

[2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/M/J/15


DATA SHEET

© UCLES 2015
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group

the live examination series.


I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/22/M/J/15
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 209 210 222
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

223 226 227

Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †

140 141 144 147 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
* 58–71 Lanthanoid series
† 90–103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 231 238 237 244 243 247 247 251 252 257 258 259 260
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = atomic (proton) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2016

45 Minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*1301766353*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

IB16 06_0620_22/4RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 The particles of a substance gain energy and change from a regular ordered structure to a
disordered structure with large distances between the particles.

Which change of state is described?

A boiling
B evaporation
C melting
D sublimation

2 In the chromatography experiment shown, which label represents the solvent front?

3 X is a mixture of colourless compounds. The diagram shows a chromatogram of X and of three


pure compounds, P, Q and R.

X P Q R

Which statement is not correct?

A A locating agent was used to develop the chromatogram of X.


B P and R could be present in X.
C P and R have different solubilities in the solvent.
D Q has a greater Rf value than R.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


3

4 Which statements about isotopes of the same element are correct?

1 They are atoms which have the same chemical properties because they have the
same number of electrons in their outer shell.
2 They are atoms which have the same number of electrons and neutrons but
different numbers of protons.
3 They are atoms which have the same number of electrons and protons but different
numbers of neutrons.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 3 only

5 The table shows the electronic structure of four atoms.

atom electronic structure

W 2,8,1
X 2,8,4
Y 2,8,7
Z 2,8,8

Which two atoms combine to form a covalent compound?

A W and X B W and Y C X and Y D X and Z

6 Which statement describes the attractive forces between molecules (intermolecular forces)?

A They are strong covalent bonds which hold molecules together.


B They are strong ionic bonds which hold molecules together.
C They are weak forces formed between covalently-bonded molecules.
D They are weak forces which hold ions together in a lattice.

7 Metals consist of a lattice of positive ions in a ‘sea of electrons’.

Why is aluminium malleable?

A Its ions are attracted to the ‘sea of electrons’.


B Its ions are tightly packed together.
C Its ions repel each other.
D Its layers of ions can slide over each other.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


4

8 A sample of 16.0 g of a metal oxide, MO, is reduced to 12.8 g of the metal, M.

What is the relative atomic mass, Ar, of M?

A 32 B 64 C 80 D 128

9 The equation for the reaction between calcium carbonate and hydrochloric acid is shown.

CaCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → CaCl 2(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)

How many moles of calcium carbonate will give 24 cm3 of carbon dioxide when reacted with an
excess of the acid?

A 1 mol B 0.1 mol C 0.01 mol D 0.001 mol

10 The diagram shows the electrolysis of molten zinc chloride, ZnCl 2.

electrode X + – electrode Y

molten zinc
chloride

Which statement is correct?

A Oxidation occurs at electrode X and the equation is: 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e–.

B Oxidation occurs at electrode Y and the equation is: Zn2+ + 2e– → Zn.

C Reduction occurs at electrode X and the equation is: Zn2+ + 2e– → Zn.

D Reduction occurs at electrode Y and the equation is: 2Cl – → Cl 2 + 2e–.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


5

11 The diagram shows some properties that substances may have.

To which labelled part of the diagram does 235U belong?

used as
compound A an energy
source
C
B D

radioactive

12 The diagram shows a simple cell.

flow of electrons

wire

metal X metal Y

dilute
sulfuric acid

For which pair of metals would electrons flow from metal X to metal Y?

X Y

A copper iron
B copper zinc
C iron zinc
D zinc iron

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


6

13 The energy level diagram for the combustion of methane is shown.

CH4(g) + 2O2(g)

energy energy change

CO2(g) + 2H2O(g)

Which row gives the equation and energy change for this reaction?

equation energy change in kJ / mol

A CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g) +891


B CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g) –891
C CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(I) +891
D CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(I) –891

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


7

14 A liquid X reacts with solid Y to form a gas.

Which two diagrams show suitable methods for investigating the rate (speed) of the reaction?

1 2
cotton wool cotton wool

X X
Y Y

balance

3 4
stopper stopper

X X
Y Y

balance

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

15 Which row describes how the energy of collision between particles changes when concentration
and temperature are increased?

concentration temperature

A increases increases
B increases no change
C no change increases
D no change no change

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


8

16 Methanol is made by reacting carbon monoxide with hydrogen.

The reaction is exothermic and is a chemical equilibrium.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

Which changes in temperature and pressure increase the yield of methanol?

temperature pressure

A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase

17 Which equation represents a reduction reaction?

A Fe2+ + e– → Fe3+

B Fe2+ → Fe3+ + e–

C Fe3+ + e– → Fe2+

D Fe3+ → Fe2+ + e–

18 Which statements are properties of an acid?

1 reacts with ammonium sulfate to form ammonia


2 turns red litmus blue

1 2

A  
B  
C  
D  

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


9

19 Which row describes whether an amphoteric oxide reacts with acids and bases?

reacts with acids reacts with bases

A no no
B no yes
C yes no
D yes yes

20 Silver chloride is insoluble in water and is prepared by precipitation.

Which two substances can be used to make silver chloride?

A barium chloride and silver nitrate


B hydrochloric acid and silver
C hydrochloric acid and silver bromide
D sodium chloride and silver iodide

21 Where in the Periodic Table is the metallic character of the elements greatest?

left or right at the top or bottom


side of a period of a group

A left bottom
B left top
C right bottom
D right top

22 Rubidium is a Group I metal.

Which statement about rubidium is not correct?

A It has a higher melting point than lithium.


B It has one electron in its outer shell.
C It reacts vigorously with water.
D It reacts with chlorine to form rubidium chloride, RbCl .

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


10

23 The table gives information about four elements, P, Q, R and S.

melting point electrical conductivity colour of iodide


density in g / cm3
in °C of element when solid of element

P 98 good 0.97 white


Q –39 good 13.53 red
R 1410 poor 2.33 colourless
S 1535 good 7.87 green

Which elements could be transition elements?

A P, Q and S B Q and S only C R and S only D S only

24 Part of the Periodic Table is shown.

Which element is a gas that does not form a compound with potassium?

A B
C D

25 Some magnesium compounds undergo thermal decomposition.

What are the products of thermal decomposition of magnesium nitrate, Mg(NO3)2, and
magnesium hydroxide, Mg(OH)2?

Mg(NO3)2 Mg(OH)2

A MgO, NO2 and O2 MgO and H2O


B MgO, NO2 and O2 MgO and H2
C Mg(NO2)2 and O2 MgO and H2O
D Mg(NO2)2 and O2 MgO and H2

26 Which property is not considered a typical metallic property?

A good conductor of heat


B low melting point
C malleable (can be hammered into shape)
D strong

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


11

27 Iron from a blast furnace is treated with oxygen and with calcium oxide to make steel.

Which substances in the iron are removed?

calcium oxide
oxygen removes
removes

A carbon acidic oxides


B carbon basic oxides
C iron acidic oxides
D iron basic oxides

28 Why is cryolite used during the extraction of aluminium by electrolysis?

A It is a catalyst for the reaction.


B It lowers the melting point of the electrolyte.
C It protects the anodes.
D It separates the aluminium from the electrolyte.

29 The diagram shows an experiment to investigate how paint affects the rusting of iron.

P Q
iron painted iron

air

water

What happens to the water level in tubes P and Q?

tube P tube Q

A falls rises
B no change rises
C rises falls
D rises no change

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


12

30 A new planet has been discovered and its atmosphere has been analysed.

atmosphere

planet

The table shows the composition of its atmosphere.

gas percentage by volume

carbon dioxide 4
nitrogen 72
oxygen 24

Which gases are present in the atmosphere of the planet in a higher percentage than they are in
the Earth’s atmosphere?

A carbon dioxide and oxygen


B carbon dioxide only
C nitrogen and oxygen
D nitrogen only

31 The gases coming from a car’s engine contain oxides of nitrogen.

How are these oxides formed?

A Nitrogen reacts with carbon dioxide.


B Nitrogen reacts with carbon monoxide.
C Nitrogen reacts with oxygen.
D Nitrogen reacts with petrol.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


13

32 Ammonia is manufactured by a reversible reaction.

N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

What is the effect of increasing the pressure on the percentage yield and rate of formation of
ammonia?

rate of
percentage yield
formation

A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases

33 The Contact process is used for the manufacture of sulfuric acid.

Which statement about this process is not correct?

A A catalyst of iron is used.


B Oxygen from the air is used to react with sulfur dioxide.
C Sulfur trioxide dissolves in sulfuric acid to form oleum.

D The temperature used is around 450 °C.

34 Lime (calcium oxide) is used to treat waste water from a factory.

Which substance is removed by the lime?

A ammonia
B sodium chloride
C sodium hydroxide
D sulfuric acid

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16 [Turn over


14

35 The diagram shows the separation of petroleum into fractions.

gasoline

petroleum Z

bitumen

What could X, Y and Z represent?

X Y Z

A diesel oil lubricating fraction paraffin


B lubricating fraction diesel oil paraffin
C paraffin lubricating fraction diesel oil
D paraffin diesel oil lubricating fraction

36 Which compound is not an alkane, CnH2n+2?

A CH3CH2CH2CH3
B (CH3)2CHCH3
C CH3CHCHCH3
D (CH3)3CH

37 An ester is formed when a carboxylic acid reacts with an alcohol.

Which ester is formed when propanoic acid and ethanol react?

A CH3CO2CH2CH3
B CH3CO2CH2CH2CH3
C CH3CH2CO2CH3
D CH3CH2CO2CH2CH3

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


15

38 What is an advantage of producing ethanol by fermentation of sugar compared to the catalytic


addition of steam to ethene?

A The alcohol produced is purer.


B The process is faster.
C The process uses high temperature.
D The process uses renewable raw materials.

39 In which row are the monomer and polymer chain correctly matched?

monomer part of the polymer chain

A CH3CH=CHCH3 –CH(CH3)–CH(CH3)–CH(CH3)–CH(CH3)–
B CH2=CHCl –CHCl –CHCl –CHCl –CHCl –
C CH3CH=CH2 –CH3–CH–CH2–CH3–CH–CH2–
D CH2=CHCH2CH3 –CH2–CH2–CH2–CH(CH2CH3)–

40 Which two polymers have the same linkages bonding the monomers together?

A nylon and complex carbohydrate


B nylon and protein
C Terylene and complex carbohydrate
D Terylene and protein

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/M/J/16


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/M/J/16
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*3291778503*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2016


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

IB16 06_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1
(a) For each of the following, give the name of an element from Period 2 (lithium to neon), which
matches the description.
Elements may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(i) an element which is gaseous at room temperature and pressure

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) an element which forms an oxide that is a reactant in photosynthesis

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) an element that is a product of photosynthesis

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) an element that makes up approximately 78% by volume of the air

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) an element which has atoms with a full outer shell of electrons

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(vi) an element which exists as both diamond and graphite

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(vii) an element that reacts vigorously with cold water

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(viii) a soft metallic element which is stored in oil

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Give the formula of a compound that contains

(i) only boron and oxygen, ................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) only lithium and nitrogen. . ............................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


3

2 (a) (i) Define the term atomic number.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Define the term nucleon number.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some atoms or ions.

Complete the table. The first line is given as an example.

number of number of number of symbol or


particle
protons electrons neutrons formula
12
A 6 6 6 6C

B 12 12 12

C 8 16 2-
8O

D 11 10 13
[6]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16 [Turn over


4

3 Gallium is a metallic element in Group III. It has similar properties to aluminium.

(a) (i) Describe the structure and bonding in a metallic element.


You should include a labelled diagram in your answer.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain why metallic elements such as gallium are good conductors of electricity.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Give the formula of

gallium(III) chloride, ...................................................................................................................

gallium(III) sulfate. .....................................................................................................................


[2]

(c) Gallium(III) oxide, Ga2O3, is amphoteric.

(i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between gallium(III) oxide and dilute nitric
acid to form a salt and water only.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The reaction between gallium(III) oxide and sodium hydroxide solution forms only water
and a salt containing the negative ion Ga2O42–.

Write the chemical equation for this reaction.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Alloys of gallium and other elements are often more useful than the metallic element itself.

Suggest two reasons why alloys of gallium are more useful than the metallic element.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


5

4 Hydrogen can be manufactured from methane by steam reforming.

CH4(g) + H2O(g) CO(g) + 3H2(g)

The reaction is carried out using a nickel catalyst at temperatures between 700 °C and 1100 °C and
using a pressure of one atmosphere.

The forward reaction is endothermic.

(a) What is meant by the term catalyst?

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Suggest two reasons why a temperature lower than 700 °C is not used.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Suggest one advantage of using a pressure greater than one atmosphere.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Suggest one disadvantage of using a pressure greater than one atmosphere.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) Hydrogen can also be manufactured by electrolysis. The electrolyte is concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride. The electrodes are inert.

The products of electrolysis are hydrogen, chlorine and sodium hydroxide.

(i) Define the term electrolysis.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Name a substance that can be used as the inert electrodes.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction in which hydrogen is produced.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Where is hydrogen produced in the electrolytic cell?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16 [Turn over


6

(v) Describe a test for chlorine.

test . .....................................................................................................................................

result . ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride can be represented by the following
word equation.

sodium chloride + water → sodium hydroxide + hydrogen + chlorine

Construct a chemical equation to represent this reaction. Do not include state symbols.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(g) State one use of

chlorine, ......................................................................................................................................

sodium hydroxide, ......................................................................................................................

hydrogen. ...................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 18]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


7

5 (a) Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain hydrogen and carbon only.

• 10 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, are burned in 100 cm3 of oxygen, which is an


excess of oxygen.

• After cooling to room temperature and pressure, there is 25 cm3 of unreacted oxygen,
50 cm3 of carbon dioxide and some liquid water.

All volumes are measured under the same conditions of temperature and pressure.

(i) What is meant by an excess of oxygen?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What was the volume of oxygen that reacted with the hydrocarbon?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Complete the table below to express the smallest whole number ratio of

volume of
volume of volume of
: : carbon dioxide
hydrocarbon reacted oxygen reacted
produced

volume of
volume of volume of
carbon dioxide
hydrocarbon reacted oxygen reacted
produced

smallest whole
number ratio of
volumes
[1]

(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to find the mole ratio in the equation below. Complete the
equation and deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon.

.........CxHy(g) + .........O2(g) → .........CO2(g) + .........H2O(l)

formula of hydrocarbon = ...........................................


[2]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16 [Turn over


8

(b) Cracking is used to convert long chain alkanes into shorter chain alkanes and alkenes. Alkenes
are unsaturated compounds.

Decane, C10H22, can be cracked to give propene and one other product.

(i) Complete the chemical equation.

C10H22 → C3H6 + ...............


[1]

(ii) What is meant by the term unsaturated?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Describe a test to show that propene is an unsaturated compound.

test . .....................................................................................................................................

result . ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Propene can be polymerised. The only product is polypropene. The equation for the
polymerisation is:

CH3 H

nC3H6 C C

H H n

(i) Name the type of polymerisation that occurs.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Deduce the maximum mass of polypropene that could be produced from 1 kg of propene.

............... kg [1]

(iii) Give the empirical formula of

propene, ..............................................................................................................................

polypropene. . ......................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 13]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


9

6 Zinc is extracted from an ore called zinc blende, which consists mainly of zinc sulfide, ZnS.

(a) (i) The zinc sulfide in the ore is first converted into zinc oxide.

Describe how zinc oxide is made from zinc sulfide.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction in (a)(i).

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Zinc oxide and coke are fed into a furnace. Hot air is blown
into the bottom of the furnace.

Zinc has a melting point of 420 °C and a boiling point of 907 °C. The temperature inside the
furnace is over 1000 °C.

(i) Explain how zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Your answer should include details of how
the heat is produced and equations for all the reactions you describe.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain why the zinc produced inside the furnace is a gas.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State the name of the physical change for conversion of gaseous zinc into molten zinc.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16 [Turn over


10

(c) Rusting of steel can be prevented by coating the steel with a layer of zinc.

Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why steel does not rust even if the layer of zinc is
scratched so that the steel is exposed to air and water.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(d) When a sample of steel is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous solution of
iron(II) chloride, FeCl 2, is formed.

When a sample of rust is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous solution of


iron(III) chloride, FeCl 3, is formed.

(i) Aqueous sodium hydroxide is added to the solutions of iron(II) chloride and
iron(III) chloride.

Complete the table below, showing the observations you would expect to make.

iron(II) chloride solution iron(III) chloride solution

aqueous
sodium hydroxide

[2]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


11

Solutions of iron(II) chloride and iron(III) chloride were added to solutions of potassium iodide
and acidified potassium manganate(VII). The results are shown in the table.

iron(II) chloride iron(III) chloride


solution solution
solution turns
potassium
no change from colourless
iodide solution
to brown

acidified potassium solution turns


manganate(VII) from purple no change
solution to colourless

(ii) What types of substance cause potassium iodide solution to turn from colourless to
brown?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) What types of substance cause acidified potassium manganate(VII) solution to turn from
purple to colourless?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Which ion in iron(III) chloride solution causes potassium iodide solution to turn from
colourless to brown?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) Which ion in iron(II) chloride solution causes acidified potassium manganate(VII) solution
to turn from purple to colourless?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 18]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2016
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/M/J/16
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2553361951*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2016


1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

IB16 06_0620_62/4RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 The diagram shows the apparatus used to reduce copper(II) oxide with hydrogen.

copper(II) oxide excess hydrogen


burning in air
hydrogen

ice

colourless liquid

(a) Complete the boxes to name the apparatus. [2]

(b) Use an arrow to indicate where heat is applied. [1]

(c) The colour of the copper(II) oxide changes from ............................. to ............................ . [2]

(d) Suggest a reason why the U-tube is surrounded by ice.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) (i) Identify the colourless liquid formed.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Give a chemical test for this liquid.

test . .....................................................................................................................................

result . ..................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) How could you show that this liquid is pure?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16


3

2 A student investigated the rate of reaction between hydrogen peroxide and aqueous
potassium iodide. When these chemicals react they form iodine. Sodium thiosulfate solution reacts
with iodine and can be used to show how fast the reaction proceeds.

(a) A burette was filled up to the 0.0 cm3 mark with sodium thiosulfate solution.
Using a large measuring cylinder, 100 cm3 of distilled water were poured into a conical flask.
Using a small measuring cylinder, 6 cm3 of sulfuric acid, 1 cm3 of starch solution and 4 cm3 of
aqueous potassium iodide were added to the flask.
0.5 cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution was added from the burette to the mixture in the flask
and swirled to mix.
The reaction was then started by adding 3 cm3 of hydrogen peroxide solution to the mixture,
and the timer started.
The time taken for a blue colour to appear was noted.
A further 0.5 cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution was added to the mixture in the conical flask,
swirled and the blue colour disappeared. The time when the blue colour reappeared was noted.
The experiment continued by adding further 0.5 cm3 portions of sodium thiosulfate solution
until a total of 3.0 cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution had been added, noting the times at which
the blue colour reappeared.

Use the timer diagrams on page 4 to record the times in seconds in the table.

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16 [Turn over


4

total volume of time at which


timer
sodium thiosulfate blue colour
diagram
solution added / cm3 appeared / s
0 seconds
0

0.5 45 15 5 15

10
30 minutes
0
0

1.0 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

1.5 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

2.0 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

2.5 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

3.0 45 15 5 15

10
30

[3]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16


5

(b) Plot the results you have obtained on the grid and draw a best-fit straight-line graph.

time / s

0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

volume of sodium thiosulfate solution / cm3


[5]

(c) (i) From your graph deduce the time at which the blue colour would appear if a total of
4.0 cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution were added to the mixture in the conical flask.
Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Sketch on the grid the graph you would expect if the experiment was repeated at a higher
temperature. [1]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16 [Turn over


6

(d) Suggest the purpose of the starch solution.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) (i) Suggest one advantage of using a pipette to measure the volume of the hydrogen peroxide.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest and explain one disadvantage of using a pipette to measure the volume of the
hydrogen peroxide.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(f) Explain one disadvantage of using a beaker instead of a conical flask.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16


7

3 Two solids, E and F, were analysed. Solid E was sodium sulfite. Both solids were found to be water
soluble.
The tests on the solids, and some of the observations, are shown below.

tests on solid E

(a) Describe the appearance of the solid.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Distilled water was added to solid E in a test-tube and shaken to dissolve.

The solution was divided into two portions in two test-tubes and the following tests carried out.

(i) Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the first portion of the solution.

observations .................................................................................................................. [1]

(ii) Dilute hydrochloric acid was added to the second portion of the solution. The mixture
was warmed. The gas given off was tested with a piece of filter paper soaked in aqueous
acidified potassium manganate(VII) solution.

observations ........................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) A flame test was carried out on solid E.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

tests on solid F

tests observations

The solid was heated. The gas given off was pungent gas evolved
tested with damp, red litmus paper.
red litmus paper turned blue

Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to pungent gas evolved


solid F and the mixture heated. The gas given
off was tested. Universal Indicator paper showed pH 10

(d) Identify the gas given off in the tests on solid F.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) Identify one of the ions in solid F.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16 [Turn over


8

4 Potassium sulfate is the salt produced when sulfuric acid is neutralised by potassium hydroxide
solution.
The correct amount of potassium hydroxide solution must be added to neutralise all of the
sulfuric acid.
Plan an experiment to obtain pure crystals of potassium sulfate from sulfuric acid and
potassium hydroxide solution.
You are provided with common laboratory apparatus.

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/62/M/J/16


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*6632393932*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB17 06_0620_22/2RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 Small crystals of purple KMnO4 (Mr = 158) and orange K2Cr2O7 (Mr = 294) were placed at the
centres of separate petri dishes filled with agar jelly. They were left to stand under the same
physical conditions.

After some time, the colour of each substance had spread out as shown.

dish 1 dish 2

KMnO4 K2Cr2O7

The lengths of the arrows indicate the relative distances travelled by particles of each substance.

Which statement is correct?

A Diffusion is faster in dish 1 because the mass of the particles is greater.


B Diffusion is faster in dish 2 because the mass of the particles is greater.
C Diffusion is slower in dish 1 because the mass of the particles is smaller.
D Diffusion is slower in dish 2 because the mass of the particles is greater.

2 Impurities change the melting and boiling points of substances.

Sodium chloride is added to a sample of pure water.

How does the addition of sodium chloride affect the melting point and boiling point of the water?

melting point boiling point

A increases increases
B increases decreases
C decreases increases
D decreases decreases

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


3

3 The diagram shows a chromatogram of four substances.

Which substance has an Rf value of approximately 0.32?

solvent front
19 cm

14 cm
12 cm

6 cm

4 cm

baseline
0 cm
A B C D

4 Which element does not form a stable ion with the same electronic structure as argon?

A aluminium
B chlorine
C phosphorus
D potassium

5 Graphite and diamond are both forms of the element carbon.

Which row shows the number of other carbon atoms that each carbon atom is covalently bonded
to in graphite and diamond?

graphite diamond

A 3 3
B 3 4
C 4 3
D 4 4

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


4

6 Which statement describes metallic bonding?

A The attraction between a lattice of negative ions and delocalised protons.


B The attraction between a lattice of positive ions and delocalised electrons.
C The attraction between delocalised protons and electrons.
D The attraction between oppositely charged ions.

7 Which equations are balanced?

1 Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2

2 ZnCO3 + 2HCl → ZnCl 2 + CO2 + 2H2O

3 Mg(NO3)2 + NaOH → Mg(OH)2 + 2NaNO3

4 CaCO3 + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + H2O + CO2

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

8 Calcium carbide, CaC2, reacts with water to form ethyne, C2H2, and calcium hydroxide.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

CaC2(s) + 2H2O(l) → C2H2(g) + Ca(OH)2(s)

Which volume of ethyne is produced when 6 g of water react completely with calcium carbide?

A 4 dm3 B 8 dm3 C 36 dm3 D 72 dm3

9 Which statement about electrolysis is correct?

A Electrons move through the electrolyte from the cathode to the anode.
B Electrons move towards the cathode in the external circuit.
C Negative ions move towards the anode in the external circuit.
D Positive ions move through the electrolyte towards the anode during electrolysis.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


5

10 The reactivity series for a number of different metals is shown.

most reactive least reactive


magnesium zinc iron copper silver platinum

The diagram shows different metal strips dipped into an electrolyte.

metal strip metal strip

electrolyte

Which pair of metals produces the highest voltage?

A copper and magnesium


B magnesium and platinum
C magnesium and zinc
D silver and platinum

11 Which statement about fuels is correct?

A Heat energy can only be produced by burning fuels.


B Hydrogen is used as a fuel although it is difficult to store.
C Methane is a good fuel because it produces only water when burned.
D Uranium is burned in air to produce energy.

12 Which statements about exothermic and endothermic reactions are correct?

1 During an exothermic reaction, heat is given out.


2 The temperature of an endothermic reaction goes up because heat is taken in.
3 Burning methane in the air is an exothermic reaction.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


6

13 The equation for the reaction between hydrogen and chlorine is shown.

H2(g) + Cl 2(g) → 2HCl (g)

The reaction is exothermic.

The bond energies are shown in the table.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

Cl –Cl +240
H–Cl +430
H–H +436

What is the energy change for the reaction?

A –1536 kJ / mol
B –184 kJ / mol
C +184 kJ / mol
D +246 kJ / mol

14 A gas is produced when calcium carbonate is heated.

Which type of change is this?

A chemical
B exothermic
C physical
D separation

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


7

15 A student was investigating the reaction between marble chips and dilute hydrochloric acid.

gas syringe

bung

marble
chips 25 cm3 of dilute
hydrochloric acid

Which changes slow down the rate of reaction?

temperature concentration surface area


of acid of acid of marble chips

A decrease decrease decrease


B decrease decrease increase
C increase decrease decrease
D increase increase increase

16 The reaction used to manufacture ammonia from nitrogen and hydrogen is reversible.

An equilibrium can be established between ammonia, nitrogen and hydrogen.

Which statement describes the equilibrium?

A Both the forward reaction and the backward reaction have the same rate.
B The rate of the backward reaction is greater than the rate of the forward reaction.
C The rate of the forward reaction is greater than the rate of the backward reaction.
D The forward and backward reactions have both stopped.

17 An example of a redox reaction is shown.

Zn + Cu2+ → Zn2+ + Cu

Which statement about the reaction is correct?

A Zn is the oxidising agent and it oxidises Cu2+.


B Zn is the oxidising agent and it reduces Cu2+.
C Zn is the reducing agent and it oxidises Cu2+.
D Zn is the reducing agent and it reduces Cu2+.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


8

18 Which type of oxide is aluminium oxide?

A acidic
B amphoteric
C basic
D neutral

19 Which statements about a weak acid, such as ethanoic acid, are correct?

1 It reacts with a carbonate.


2 It does not neutralise aqueous sodium hydroxide solution.
3 It turns red litmus blue.
4 It is only partially ionised in aqueous solution.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

20 Silver chloride is a white solid which is insoluble in water.

Which statement describes how a sample of pure silver chloride can be made?

A Add aqueous silver nitrate to aqueous sodium chloride and then filter.
B Add aqueous silver nitrate to dilute hydrochloric acid, evaporate and then crystallise.
C Add silver carbonate to dilute hydrochloric acid, evaporate and then crystallise.
D Add silver to dilute hydrochloric acid, filter and then wash the residue.

21 Dilute sulfuric acid is added to two separate aqueous solutions, X and Y. The observations are
shown.

solution X white precipitate


solution Y bubbles of a colourless gas

Which row shows the ions present in the solutions?

solution X solution Y

A Ba2+ CO32–
B Ca2+ Cl –
C Cu2+ CO32–
D Fe2+ NO3–

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


9

22 Which element is less reactive than the other members of its group in the Periodic Table?

A astatine
B caesium
C fluorine
D rubidium

23 The elements oxygen and sulfur are in the same group of the Periodic Table.

Which statement about oxygen and sulfur is not correct?

A They are non-metals.


B They have giant covalent structures.
C They have six electrons in their outer shells.
D They react together to form an acidic oxide.

24 Why are weather balloons sometimes filled with helium rather than hydrogen?

A Helium is found in air.


B Helium is less dense than hydrogen.
C Helium is more dense than hydrogen.
D Helium is unreactive.

25 Which process is involved in the extraction of zinc from zinc blende?

A Cryolite is added to lower the melting point of zinc blende.


B Molten zinc blende is electrolysed.
C Zinc blende is heated with carbon.
D Zinc blende is roasted in air.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


10

26 Element E:

• forms an alloy

• has a basic oxide

• is below hydrogen in the reactivity series.

What is E?

A carbon
B copper
C sulfur
D zinc

27 A list of metals is shown.

aluminium
copper
iron
magnesium
silver
zinc

Which metal will displace all of the other metals from aqueous solutions of their salts?

A aluminium
B iron
C magnesium
D zinc

28 Stainless steel is an alloy of iron and other metals. It is strong and does not rust but it costs much
more than normal steel.

What is not made from stainless steel?

A cutlery
B pipes in a chemical factory
C railway lines
D saucepans

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


11

29 The diagram shows some uses of water in the home.

1 2 3

For which uses is it important for the water to have been treated?

A 1 only B 2 only C 3 only D 1, 2 and 3

30 The carbon cycle includes the processes combustion, photosynthesis and respiration.

Which row shows how each process changes the amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere?

combustion photosynthesis respiration

A decreases decreases increases


B decreases increases decreases
C increases decreases increases
D increases increases decreases

31 Which statement about the conditions used in the Haber process is not correct?

A A high temperature is used because the forward reaction is exothermic.


B A high pressure is used because there are fewer moles of gas in the products than in the
reactants.
C An iron catalyst is used to increase the rate of the forward reaction.
D The unreacted hydrogen and nitrogen are recycled to increase the amount of ammonia
produced.

32 Which chemical reaction decreases pollution in the air?

A S + O2 → SO2

B N2 + O2 → 2NO

C 2CH4 + 3O2 → 2CO + 4H2O

D 2NO + 2CO → 2CO2 + N2

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


12

33 Which statement about sulfuric acid is correct?

A It is made by the Haber process.


B It is made in the atmosphere by the action of lightning.
C It reacts with ammonia to produce a fertiliser.
D It reacts with copper metal to produce hydrogen gas.

34 Statements about methods of manufacture and uses of calcium oxide are shown.

1 It is manufactured by reacting acids with calcium carbonate.


2 It is manufactured by heating calcium carbonate.
3 It is used to desulfurise flue gases.
4 It is used to treat alkaline soil.

Which statements are correct?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

35 The industrial fractional distillation of petroleum is shown.

refinery gas

gasoline fraction

naphtha fraction

kerosene fraction

diesel oil

fuel oil fraction

petroleum Y

lubricating fraction
and bitumen

Which process happens at Y?

A burning
B condensation
C cracking
D evaporation

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


13

36 Which statement about homologous series is not correct?

A Alkenes have the same general formula, CnH2n+2.


B Each member of the homologous series of alkanes differs from the next by CH2.
C The members of a homologous series all have similar chemical properties.
D The members of a homologous series all have the same functional group.

37 The diagram shows part of the molecule of a polymer.

H H H H H H H H H

C C C C C C C C C

H H H H H H H H H

Which diagram shows the monomer from which this polymer could be manufactured?

A B C D
H H H H H H H

H C H H C C H C C H C C O H

H H H H H H H

38 Ethanol is manufactured by fermentation or by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene.

What is an advantage of ethanol manufacture by fermentation instead of by the catalytic addition


of steam to ethene?

A Ethanol manufactured by fermentation is purified by distillation.


B Ethanol manufacture by fermentation produces purer ethanol.
C Ethanol manufacture by fermentation uses large areas of land.
D Ethanol manufacture by fermentation uses renewable resources.

39 The formula of an ester is CH3CH2CH2COOCH2CH2CH3.

Which acid and alcohol react together to make the ester?

acid alcohol

A butanoic acid butanol


B butanoic acid propanol
C propanoic acid butanol
D propanoic acid propanol

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17 [Turn over


14

40 Polyesters and polyamides are types of synthetic polymer.

Which statements are correct?

1 They are made by addition polymerisation.


2 They are made by condensation polymerisation.
3 The monomers from which they are made are unsaturated hydrocarbons.
4 The monomers from which they are made contain reactive functional groups at their
ends.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/M/J/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/M/J/17
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5924154296*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2017


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB17 06_0620_42/5RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 (a) State the name of the process that is used to

(i) separate oxygen from liquid air,

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) separate the individual dyes in ink,

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) produce ethanol from simple sugars,

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride,

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) 
separate the precipitate formed when aqueous silver nitrate is added to aqueous
sodium chloride.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) State what is meant by the terms

(i) 
element,

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) 
compound,

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) 
ion.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


3

2 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV of the Periodic Table. Both carbon and silicon exist as
more than one isotope.

(a) Define the term isotopes.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Complete the following table which gives information about carbon atoms and silicon atoms.

carbon silicon

proton number

electronic structure

nucleon number 12 28

number of neutrons in one atom


[3]

(c) Silicon has a giant structure which is similar to the structure of diamond.

(i) Name the type of bond which is present between silicon atoms in silicon.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest two physical properties of silicon.


Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why silicon has these physical
properties.

property 1 ............................................................................................................................

reason 1 ...............................................................................................................................

property 2 ............................................................................................................................

reason 2 ...............................................................................................................................
[4]

(d) 
Samples of air taken from industrial areas are found to contain small amounts of
carbon monoxide.

(i) Explain how this carbon monoxide is formed.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) State why carbon monoxide should not be inhaled.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


4

(e) Carbon dioxide, CO2, is a gas at room temperature and pressure, whereas silicon(IV) oxide,
SiO2, is a solid.

(i) Name the type of structure which the following compounds have.

carbon dioxide ............................................................................................................... [1]

silicon(IV) oxide ............................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why carbon dioxide is a gas at
room temperature and pressure, whereas silicon(IV) oxide is a solid.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [3]

(f) Silicon(IV) oxide is an acidic oxide. When silicon(IV) oxide reacts with alkalis, the salts formed
contain the ion SiO32–.

Write a chemical equation for the reaction between silicon(IV) oxide and aqueous
sodium hydroxide.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


5

3 This question is about nitrogen and some of its compounds.

(a) 
Nitrogen in the air can be converted into ammonia by the Haber process. The chemical equation
for the reaction is shown.

N2 + 3H2 2NH3

(i) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process.

temperature .........................................................................................................................

pressure ...............................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Name the catalyst used in the Haber process.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) The ammonia produced in the Haber process can be oxidised to nitrogen(II) oxide at 900 °C.
The reaction is exothermic.

(i) Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.

4NH3 + .....O2 .....NO + .....H2O


[2]

(ii) Suggest a reason, other than cost, why a temperature greater than 900 °C is not used.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Suggest a reason why a temperature less than 900 °C is not used.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) Nitrogen(II) oxide can be reacted with oxygen and water to produce nitric acid as the only
product.

Write a chemical equation for this reaction.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


6

(d) Describe how you would prepare a pure dry sample of copper(II) nitrate crystals in the
laboratory using dilute nitric acid and solid copper(II) carbonate.
Include a series of key steps in your answer.
You should include a chemical equation for the reaction.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


7

Question 4 starts on the next page.

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


8

4 Nickel, copper and zinc are three consecutive elements in the Periodic Table.

(a) Nickel and copper are transition elements.

State three chemical properties of transition elements.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Copper(II) oxide is a basic oxide but zinc oxide is an amphoteric oxide. Both oxides are
insoluble in water.

You are provided with a mixture of solid copper(II) oxide and solid zinc oxide. Describe how
you would obtain a sample of copper(II) oxide from this mixture.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Three cells are set up each using two metals.

cell 1 cell 2 cell 3

1.10 V 0.51 V ......... V


V V V
– + – +

zinc copper zinc nickel copper nickel

electrolyte electrolyte electrolyte

(i) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the zinc electrode in cell 1.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


9

(ii) Put the three metals, copper, nickel and zinc, in order of reactivity.

most reactive .........................................

.........................................

least reactive .........................................


[1]

(iii) Complete the labelling in cell 3 by writing the polarity (+/–) of each electrode in the circles
and calculating the reading on the voltmeter. [2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


10

5 (a) The elements in Group VII are known as the halogens. Some halogens react with aqueous
solutions of halides.

(i) Complete the table by adding a  to indicate when a reaction occurs and a  to indicate
when no reaction occurs.

aqueous aqueous aqueous


potassium chloride potassium bromide potassium iodide
chlorine  
bromine 
iodine 
[3]

(ii) 
Write a chemical equation for the reaction between chlorine and aqueous potassium bromide.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) A sample of vanadium chloride was weighed and dissolved in water. An excess of aqueous
silver  nitrate, acidified with dilute nitric acid, was added. A precipitate of silver chloride was
formed. The ionic equation for this reaction is shown.

Ag+(aq) + Cl –(aq) AgCl (s)

The mass of silver chloride formed was 2.87 g.

(i) State the colour of the precipitate of silver chloride.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) The relative formula mass of silver chloride, AgCl, is 143.5.

Calculate the number of moles in 2.87 g of AgCl.

moles of AgCl = .............................. mol [1]

(iii) Use your answer to (b)(ii) and the ionic equation to deduce the number of moles of chloride
ions, Cl –, that produced 2.87 g of AgCl.

moles of Cl – = .............................. mol [1]

(iv) The amount of vanadium chloride in the sample was 0.01 moles.

Use this and your answer to (b)(iii) to deduce the whole number ratio of moles of
vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions.
Deduce the formula of vanadium chloride.

moles of vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions ................... : ...................

formula of vanadium chloride ..............................................................................................


[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


11

(c) Astatine is at the bottom of Group VII. Use your knowledge of the properties of the halogens to

(i) 
predict the physical state of astatine at room temperature and pressure,

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) 
write a chemical equation for the reaction between sodium and astatine.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine. The chemical equation is shown.

I2 + Cl 2 2ICl

Use the bond energies to answer the questions.

bond bond energy in kJ / mol


I–I 151
Cl –Cl 242
I–Cl 208

(i) Calculate the total amount of energy required to break the bonds in 1 mole of I2 and
1 mole of Cl 2.

............................ kJ [1]

(ii) Calculate the total amount of energy given out when the bonds in 2 moles of ICl are
formed.

............................ kJ [1]

(iii) Use your answers to (d)(i) and (d)(ii) to calculate the overall energy change for the
reaction.

I2 + Cl 2 2ICl

............................ kJ / mol [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


12

6 (a) An homologous series is a ‘family’ of organic compounds whose names have the same ending.

(i) Name the homologous series for which the names of the organic compounds end in -ene
and -oic acid.

-ene ............................................................................................................................... [1]

-oic acid ......................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State two characteristics of an homologous series.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(b) Propan-1-ol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols. It reacts in the same way as
ethanol with acidified potassium manganate(VII) and with carboxylic acids.

Name the type of compound that is formed when propan-1-ol is heated with

acidified potassium manganate(VII), .........................................................................................

ethanoic acid and a suitable catalyst. .........................................................................................


[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


13

(c) The structure of prop-2-enoic (acrylic) acid is shown.

H CO2H

C C

H H

(i) What would you see if prop-2-enoic acid were added to

aqueous bromine, ................................................................................................................

a solution of sodium carbonate. ...........................................................................................


[2]

(ii) Prop-2-enoic acid can be polymerised to form poly(acrylic acid).

Suggest the type of polymerisation that occurs and draw one repeat unit of the polymer.

type of polymerisation ..........................................................................................................

repeat unit

[3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2017
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/M/J/17
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education


CHEMISTRY 0620/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2017
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

IB17 06_0620_62/FP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 A student investigated the rate of reaction between an excess of dilute hydrochloric acid and
magnesium ribbon. The apparatus is shown.

.........................................

.........................................

magnesium ribbon water

dilute
hydrochloric
acid

Two experiments were carried out. The temperature was the same in each case.

(a) Complete the boxes to identify the apparatus. [2]

(b) Give one observation expected during this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

Graphs were drawn from the results for each experiment as shown.

100
90
Experiment 1
80
70
60
volume of
gas / cm3 50
40
Experiment 2
30
20
10
0

(c) Label the x-axis of the graph. [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17


3

(d) (i) Give the volumes of gas at which the two graphs level out and compare these values.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest why the graphs level out at different volumes.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The graph has been drawn again.

Draw the curve expected if Experiment 1 were repeated using the same mass of
magnesium powder instead of magnesium ribbon.

100
90
Experiment 1
80
70
60
volume of
gas / cm3 50
40
Experiment 2
30
20
10
0
[2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17 [Turn over


4

2 A student investigated the reaction between aqueous potassium manganate(VII), solution A, and
two solutions of iron(II) sulfate, solution B and solution C, of different concentrations.

Two experiments were carried out.

Experiment 1

● A burette was filled with solution A to the 0.0 cm3 mark.


● A measuring cylinder was used to pour 25 cm3 of solution B into a conical flask.
● Solution A was added to the flask, while the flask was swirled, until the mixture just turned
permanently pink. The burette reading was recorded.

(a) Use the burette diagram to record the reading in the table and complete the table.

12

13

14

final reading

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

difference / cm3
[2]

Experiment 2

● Experiment 1 was repeated using 25 cm3 of solution C instead of solution B. In Experiment 2


the burette was not filled to the 0.0 cm3 mark.

(b) Use the burette diagrams to record the readings in the table and complete the table.

2 40

3 41

4 42

initial reading final reading

final burette reading / cm3

initial burette reading / cm3

difference / cm3
[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17


5

(c) Why is an indicator not added to the conical flask?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) (i) Which solution of iron(II) sulfate, solution B or solution C, is the more concentrated?
Explain your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) How many times more concentrated is this solution of iron(II) sulfate?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) (i) If Experiment 2 were repeated using 50 cm3 of solution C, what volume of solution A would
be needed? Explain your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest a practical problem that using 50 cm3 of solution C in this investigation would
cause. Suggest a practical solution to the problem.

problem ...............................................................................................................................

solution ...............................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of using a measuring cylinder instead of a
25 cm3 pipette for solution B.

advantage ..................................................................................................................................

disadvantage .............................................................................................................................
[2]

(g) How would the results be improved by taking repeated measurements?

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17 [Turn over


6

3 Two solids, E and F, which are both salts, were analysed. Solid F was lithium chloride.
Tests were carried out on each solid.
Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solid E

tests on solid E observations

test 1

A flame test was carried out on solid E. yellow colour

test 2

10 cm3 of distilled water were poured into a boiling tube. The initial temperature of the water was
measured.
Solid E was added to the boiling tube and the boiling tube was shaken to dissolve solid E. The
temperature of the solution was measured after 1 minute.

(a) Use the thermometer diagrams in the table to record the temperatures and complete the table.

20
temperature of
the solution after 15
1 minute / C
10

30
initial temperature
25
of the water / C
20

temperature difference / C
[2]

The solution was divided into two equal portions in two test-tubes and the following tests carried
out.

tests on solid E observations

test 3

Dilute hydrochloric acid was added to the first filter paper turned from purple to colourless
portion of the solution. The gas given off was
tested with filter paper dipped into acidified
aqueous potassium manganate(VII).

test 4

An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was no change


added to the second portion of the solution.

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17


7

(b) What does the temperature change tell you about the process occurring in test 2?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Name the gas given off in test 3.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Identify solid E.

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

tests on solid F

Complete the expected observations.

(e) A flame test was carried out on solid F.

observations ........................................................................................................................ [1]

Solid F was added to distilled water in a test-tube and the test-tube shaken to dissolve solid F.

(f) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added to the solution.

observations ........................................................................................................................ [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17 [Turn over


8

4 Calcium carbonate and kaolinite are both white solids found in sedimentary rocks.

Calcium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to form aqueous calcium chloride. Kaolinite
does not react with dilute acids.

You are provided with a mixture of calcium carbonate and kaolinite and access to
dilute hydrochloric acid.

Plan an experiment to determine the percentage by mass of calcium carbonate in the mixture.

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/M/J/17


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2018

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*2609976664*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 06_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 A gas is released at point X in the apparatus shown.

damp Universal Indicator paper

Which gas turns the damp Universal Indicator paper red most quickly?

A ammonia, NH3
B chlorine, Cl 2
C hydrogen chloride, HCl
D sulfur dioxide, SO2

2 A chromatography experiment was done to separate a mixture of four substances.

The Rf values measured for these substances were 0.3, 0.5, 0.8 and 0.8.

Which diagram shows the chromatogram obtained?

A B C D

solvent front

baseline

3 Which piece of apparatus cannot be used to collect and measure the volume of gas produced in
an experiment?

A burette
B gas syringe
C measuring cylinder
D pipette

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


3

4 The ‘lead’ in a pencil is made of a mixture of graphite and clay.

‘lead’

When the percentage of graphite is increased, the pencil slides across the paper more easily.

Which statement explains this observation?

A Graphite has a high melting point.


B Graphite is a form of carbon.
C Graphite is a lubricant.
D Graphite is a non-metal.

5 Which pair shows particles with the same chemical properties?


23 23 +
A 11 M and 11M

23 24
B 11 M and 11M

23 23
C 11 M and 12 M

24 + 24 +
D 11M and 12 M

6 Which substances have similar structures?

A diamond and graphite

B diamond and silicon(IV) oxide

C graphite and poly(ethene)

D graphite and silicon(IV) oxide

7 Which substance is not a macromolecule?

A diamond
B graphite

C silicon(IV) oxide

D sulfur

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18 [Turn over


4

8 The equation for the reaction between potassium carbonate and nitric acid is shown.

K2CO3 + 2HNO3 → 2KNO3 + H2O + CO2

Which volume of carbon dioxide is produced from 69 g of potassium carbonate?

A 6 dm3 B 12 dm3 C 24 dm3 D 48 dm3

9 A solution of sodium carbonate, Na2CO3, has a concentration of 0.03 mol / dm3.

Which mass of sodium carbonate is dissolved in 1 dm3 of this solution?

A 1.06 g B 3.18 g C 10.60 g D 31.80 g

10 Aqueous copper(II) sulfate is electrolysed using copper electrodes.

Which statement about the electrolysis is not correct?

A An oxidation reaction occurs at the positive electrode.


B The current is carried through the electrolyte by ions.
C The negative electrode gains mass.

D The number of copper(II) ions in the electrolyte decreases.

11 Dilute sulfuric acid is electrolysed using inert electrodes.

What are the ionic half-equations for the reactions that take place at each electrode?

positive electrode negative electrode

A 2H+ + 2e– → H2 4OH– → 2H2O + O2 + 4e–


B 2H+ + 2e– → H2 4OH– + 4H+ → 4H2O
C 4OH– → 2H2O + O2 + 4e– 2H+ + 2e– → H2
D 4OH– + 4H+ → 4H2O 2H+ + 2e– → H2

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


5

12 Which diagram is a correctly labelled energy level diagram for an endothermic reaction?

A B

products products

overall
activation
energy energy
overall energy energy
change activation
energy
energy
change
reactants reactants

progress of reaction progress of reaction

C D

activation
reactants reactants energy

overall activation overall


energy energy energy
energy energy
change change

products products

progress of reaction progress of reaction

13 The equation for the complete combustion of methane is shown.

CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g)

The bond energies are shown in the table.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

C–H +410
C=O +805
O–H +460
O=O +496

What is the energy change for the reaction?

A –818 kJ / mol B –359 kJ / mol C –323 kJ / mol D +102 kJ / mol

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18 [Turn over


6

14 Which row describes the effects of increasing both concentration and temperature on the
collisions between reacting particles?

increasing concentration increasing temperature


A more collisions per second only more collisions per second only
B more collisions per second and more more collisions per second only
collisions with sufficient energy to react
C more collisions per second only more collisions per second and more
collisions with sufficient energy to react
D more collisions per second and more more collisions per second and more
collisions with sufficient energy to react collisions with sufficient energy to react

15 Sulfur dioxide reacts with oxygen at 2 atmospheres pressure. The forward reaction is exothermic.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

The reaction reaches equilibrium. The pressure is then doubled.

How and why does the amount of sulfur trioxide formed change?

amount of sulfur trioxide reason

A decreases the forward reaction is exothermic


B decreases there are fewer molecules on the right
C increases the forward reaction is exothermic
D increases there are fewer molecules on the right

16 Iron(II) chloride solution reacts with chlorine gas.

The equation is shown.

2FeCl 2(aq) + Cl 2(g) → 2FeCl 3(aq)

Which statements about this reaction are correct?

1 Fe2+ ions are reduced to Fe3+ ions.


2 Chlorine acts as a reducing agent.
3 Fe2+ ions each lose an electron.
4 Cl 2 molecules are reduced to Cl – ions.

A 1 and 2 B 2 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


7

17 Which statement about oxides is correct?

A A solution of magnesium oxide has a pH less than pH 7.


B A solution of sulfur dioxide has a pH greater than pH 7.
C Magnesium oxide reacts with nitric acid to make a salt.
D Sulfur dioxide reacts with hydrochloric acid to make a salt.

18 Which statement about acids and bases is correct?

A A base is a donor of hydrogen ions.


B An acid is an acceptor of protons.
C A strong acid is fully ionised in aqueous solution.
D A weak acid cannot be used to neutralise a strong base.

19 The solubility of some salts is shown.

chloride nitrate sulfate carbonate

barium soluble soluble insoluble insoluble


lead(II) insoluble soluble insoluble insoluble
potassium soluble soluble soluble soluble
zinc soluble soluble soluble insoluble

Which two aqueous solutions produce an insoluble salt when mixed together?

A barium chloride and zinc nitrate

B barium nitrate and lead(II) nitrate

C lead(II) nitrate and potassium carbonate

D potassium nitrate and zinc sulfate

20 Which methods are suitable for preparing both zinc sulfate and copper(II) sulfate?

1 reacting the metal oxide with warm dilute aqueous sulfuric acid
2 reacting the metal with dilute aqueous sulfuric acid
3 reacting the metal carbonate with dilute aqueous sulfuric acid

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18 [Turn over


8

21 Which statement about the Periodic Table is correct?

A Elements in the same group have the same number of electron shells.
B It contains elements arranged in order of increasing proton number.
C Metals are on the right and non-metals are on the left.
D The most reactive elements are at the bottom of every group.

22 Chlorine, bromine and iodine are elements in Group VII of the Periodic Table.

Which statement about these elements is not correct?

A The colour gets darker down the group.


B The density increases down the group.
C They are all gases at room temperature and pressure.
D They are all non-metals.

23 Which row describes the properties of a transition element?

property 1 property 2

A forms colourless compounds acts as a catalyst


B forms colourless compounds low electrical conductivity
C high density acts as a catalyst
D high density low electrical conductivity

24 Stainless steel is an alloy of iron, carbon and other metals.

Which row is correct?

stainless steel resists


stainless steel is
corrosion better than
harder than pure iron
pure iron

A  
B  
C  
D  

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


9

25 Metal X is more reactive than metal Y. Metal Y is more reactive than metal Z.

Which statement is correct?

A When metal X is placed in a solution of Y sulfate, there is no reaction.


B When metal X is placed in a solution of Z sulfate, a reaction occurs.
C When metal Y is placed in a solution of Z sulfate, there is no reaction.
D When metal Z is placed in a solution of X sulfate, a reaction occurs.

26 Which statement about the industrial extraction of zinc is correct?

A Cryolite is added to lower the melting point.


B Molten zinc oxide is electrolysed.
C Zinc oxide is heated with coke.
D Zinc sulfide is heated with coke.

27 Which row describes the use of an alloy and the property upon which the use depends?

alloy use property

A mild steel cutlery resistant to corrosion


B mild steel machinery strong
C stainless steel cutlery low density
D stainless steel machinery good conductor of electricity

28 Dry air is passed over hot copper until all the oxygen has reacted.

dry air copper

heat

The volume of gas at the end of the reaction is 120 cm3.

What is the starting volume of dry air?

A 132 cm3 B 152 cm3 C 180 cm3 D 570 cm3

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18 [Turn over


10

29 A steel bicycle which had been left outdoors for several months was starting to rust.

What would not reduce the rate of corrosion?

A Remove the rust and paint the bicycle.


B Remove the rust and store the bicycle in a dry shed.
C Remove the rust and wipe the bicycle with a clean, damp cloth.
D Remove the rust and wipe the bicycle with an oily cloth.

30 Which statements about water are correct?

1 Household water contains dissolved salts.


2 Water for household use is filtered to remove soluble impurities.
3 Water is treated with chlorine to kill bacteria.
4 Water is used in industry for cooling.

A 1, 2, 3 and 4
B 1, 2 and 3 only
C 1, 3 and 4 only
D 2, 3 and 4 only

31 Ammonia is manufactured by reacting hydrogen with nitrogen in the Haber process.

Which row describes the sources of hydrogen and nitrogen and the conditions used in the
manufacture of ammonia in the Haber process?

source of source of temperature of pressure of


hydrogen nitrogen reaction / °C reaction / atm

A air natural gas 250 2


B air natural gas 250 200
C natural gas air 450 2
D natural gas air 450 200

32 Which statements about the carbon cycle are correct?

1 Carbon dioxide is added to the atmosphere by respiration.


2 Carbon dioxide is added to the atmosphere by combustion of coal.
3 Carbon dioxide is removed from the atmosphere by photosynthesis.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


11

33 Which row describes the uses of sulfur and sulfur dioxide?

sulfur sulfur dioxide

A extraction of aluminium food preservative


B extraction of aluminium water treatment
C manufacture of sulfuric acid food preservative
D manufacture of sulfuric acid water treatment

34 Limestone is used in many industrial processes.

In which process is it not used?

A manufacture of alkenes
B manufacture of cement
C manufacture of iron
D manufacture of lime

35 What is not the correct use of the fraction named?

name of fraction use

A fuel oil making waxes


B gas oil fuel in diesel engines
C kerosene jet fuel
D naphtha making chemicals

36 Which statement about alkenes is not correct?

A They decolourise aqueous bromine.


B They only contain the elements carbon and hydrogen.
C They react with hydrogen to form alkanes.
D They react with steam to produce carboxylic acids.

37 Which substances can be obtained by cracking hydrocarbons?

A ethanol and ethene


B ethanol and hydrogen
C ethene and hydrogen
D ethene and poly(ethene)

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18 [Turn over


12

38 Two processes used for the large-scale production of ethanol are shown.

process 1 A compound containing carbon, hydrogen and oxygen is used to produce


ethanol.
process 2 A compound containing carbon and hydrogen only is used to produce
ethanol.

Which statement is correct?

A Process 1 uses a renewable starting material.


B Process 1 is done at a very high temperature.
C Process 2 involves fermentation.
D Process 2 is done at room temperature.

39 What is the name of the organic product of the reaction shown?

CH3COOH + CH3CH2OH →

A ethyl ethanoate
B ethyl methanoate
C methyl ethanoate
D methyl propanoate

40 Which two compounds react together to form a condensation polymer?

A HOCH2CH2OH and CH3COOH


B HOCH2CH2OH and CH3NH2
C HOCH2CH2OH and H2NCH2CH2NH2
D HOCH2CH2OH and HOOCCH2CH2COOH

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/M/J/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2018
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/22/M/J/18
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0107966450*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2018


 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 12.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB18 06_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Give the name of the process that is used:

(a) to obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) to produce lead from molten lead(II) bromide

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) to separate an insoluble solid from a liquid

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) to separate the components of petroleum

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) to separate a mixture of coloured dyes.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


3

2 This question is about the elements in Period 3 of the Periodic Table.

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar

For each of the following, identify a Period 3 element which matches the description. Each element
may be used once, more than once or not at all.

State which Period 3 element:

(a) forms an oxide with a macromolecular structure

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) is extracted from the ore bauxite

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) is soft, metallic and stored in oil

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) is a green gas at room temperature and pressure

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) provides an inert atmosphere in lamps

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) forms two different oxides during the Contact process

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(g) is non‑metallic and an important component of fertilisers.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

3 Complete the following table.

number of number of number of number of


particle
protons electrons neutrons nucleons

11Na
23
11 11 23
................

17Cl
37 –
20
................ ................ ................
56
26.............
26 24 30 56
[6]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18 [Turn over


4

4 Potassium reacts with bromine at room temperature to form potassium bromide.

(a) Write a chemical equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Potassium bromide exists as an ionic lattice.


Potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid but does conduct electricity when
molten.

(i) What is meant by the term ionic lattice?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Explain why potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid but does conduct
electricity when molten.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) Concentrated aqueous potassium bromide is an electrolyte.

(i) What is meant by the term electrolyte?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Describe the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous potassium bromide.

Include:
●● an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode
●● the name of the product at the anode
●● the name of the potassium compound formed.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [4]

(iii) When molten potassium bromide is electrolysed, the product at the cathode is different.

Name the product at the cathode when molten potassium bromide is electrolysed.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


5

(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine to form iodine monochloride, ICl, as the only product.

(i) 
Write a chemical equation for this reaction.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) 
Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
iodine monochloride. Show outer shell electrons only.

[2]

(e) Potassium bromide has a melting point of 734 °C.


Iodine monochloride has a melting point of 27 °C.

In terms of attractive forces, explain why there is a large difference between these melting
points.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(f) When chlorine gas is passed through aqueous potassium bromide, a redox reaction occurs.
The ionic equation is shown.

Cl 2 + 2Br – 2Cl – + Br2

(i) Write an ionic half-equation showing what happens to the chlorine molecules, Cl 2, in this
reaction.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Explain why the bromide ions, Br –, act as reducing agents in this reaction.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 23]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18 [Turn over


6

5 Hydrogen and iodine react together in a reversible reaction. Hydrogen iodide is formed.

H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI(g)


colourless purple colourless
gas gas gas

The forward reaction is exothermic.

A gas syringe containing an equilibrium mixture of hydrogen, iodine and hydrogen iodide gases
was sealed and heated to 250 °C. The equilibrium mixture was a pale purple colour.

equilibrium mixture of hydrogen,


iodine and hydrogen iodide
end blocked

(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium?

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The plunger of the gas syringe was pressed in while the end of the gas syringe was blocked.
This increased the pressure. The position of the equilibrium did not change. The colour of the
gaseous mixture turned darker purple.

(i) Give a reason why the position of the equilibrium did not change.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest why the gaseous mixture turned darker purple, even though the position of the
equilibrium did not change.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) The temperature of the gas syringe was increased to 300 °C.

(i) 
What happened to the position of the equilibrium when the temperature of the gas syringe
was increased from 250 °C to 300 °C?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) What happened to the rate of the forward reaction and the rate of the backward reaction
when the temperature of the gas syringe was increased from 250 °C to 300 °C?

rate of the forward reaction ..................................................................................................

rate of the backward reaction ..............................................................................................


[2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


7

6 (a) All sodium salts are soluble in water. All nitrates are soluble in water. Barium carbonate is
insoluble in water.

Describe how you would make a pure, dry sample of barium carbonate by precipitation.
Include:
●● the names of the starting materials
●● full practical details
●● a chemical equation.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [5]

(b) Nitrates decompose when heated.

(i) Write a chemical equation for the decomposition of sodium nitrate when it is heated.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) The unbalanced chemical equation for the decomposition of hydrated copper(II) nitrate
crystals is shown.

Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.

2Cu(NO3)2.3H2O(s) .....CuO(s) + ......NO2(g) + O2(g) + ......H2O(g)


[2]

(iii) When the hydrated copper(II) nitrate crystals are heated, steam is produced. When the
steam condenses on a cool surface, it turns into a colourless liquid.

Anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride is used to show that the colourless liquid contains water.

How does the colour of the anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride change?

from ............................................................... to ................................................................


[2]

(iv) How would the student test to determine if the water produced in (b)(iii) is pure?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18 [Turn over


8

7 Many organic compounds, such as alcohols, carboxylic acids and esters, contain the elements
carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.

(a) Compound  R has the following composition by mass: C, 60.00%; H, 13.33%; O, 26.67%.

Calculate the empirical formula of compound R.

 empirical formula = .............................. [2]

(b) Compound  S has the empirical formula C2H4O and a relative molecular mass of 88.

Calculate the molecular formula of compound S.

molecular formula = .............................. [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


9

(c) Compounds T and V both have the molecular formula C3H6O2.

●● Compound  T produces bubbles of carbon dioxide gas when it is added to aqueous


sodium carbonate.
●● Compound V is an ester.

(i) What is the name given to compounds with the same molecular formula but different
structures?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Draw the structures of compounds T and V. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

compound T

compound V

[2]

(iii) All compounds with the molecular formula C3H6O2 can undergo complete combustion in
an excess of oxygen.

Complete the chemical equation for this reaction.

C3H6O2 + ........................ ........................ + ........................


[2]

(d) Compound  W has the molecular formula C2H6O. Compound W reacts when heated with
ethanoic acid and a catalyst to produce a sweet‑smelling liquid.

(i) Give the name of the homologous series to which compound W belongs.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Draw the structure of compound W. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

[1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18 [Turn over


10

(e) Alkanes and alkenes are hydrocarbons.

(i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) State the general formula of:

alkanes ................................................................................................................................

alkenes ................................................................................................................................
[2]

(f) Ethanol can be produced from long‑chain alkanes as shown.

step 1 step 2
long‑chain alkane ethene ethanol

Describe the two‑stage manufacture of ethanol from the long‑chain alkane octane, C8H18.
Include:
●● the names of the types of chemical reactions that occur
●● reaction equations
●● reaction conditions.

step 1 .........................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

step 2 .........................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [5]

[Total: 20]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


11

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2018
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
12

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/M/J/18
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*2312854938*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2018


 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 06_0620_62/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 The rate of reaction between an excess of dilute nitric acid and powdered calcium carbonate was
investigated. The carbon dioxide produced was collected. The apparatus used is shown.

dilute nitric acid


.........................................

powdered
calcium carbonate

(a) Complete the box to name the apparatus. [1]

A sketch graph of the results obtained is shown.

time

(b) (i) Label the y-axis. [1]

(ii) Explain why the sketch graph is horizontal at point X.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) Draw on the axes the graph expected if the experiment were repeated using an equal mass
of lumps of calcium carbonate. All other conditions were kept the same. [2]

(d) Describe a test for carbon dioxide.

test ..............................................................................................................................................

result ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


3

2 A student investigated the temperature changes when two different solids, solid C and solid D,
dissolved in water.

Two experiments were done.

Experiment 1

●  sing a measuring cylinder, 40 cm3 of distilled water was poured into a polystyrene cup. The
U
initial temperature of the distilled water was measured.
● 3 g of solid C was added to the polystyrene cup and the mixture was stirred with a thermometer.
The temperature of the solution was measured after 1 minute.

● The procedure was repeated using 4 g of solid C.


●  he procedure was repeated using 6 g of solid C.
T

(a) Use the thermometer diagrams to record the results in the table.

Calculate and record the temperature change in each case, including whether the temperature
increased (+) or decreased (–).

initial
temperature of
mass of thermometer temperature thermometer temperature
the solution
solid C / g diagram of the distilled diagram change / °C
after 1 min / °C
water / °C

30 20

3 25 15

20 10

30 20

4 25 15

20 10

30 20

6 25 15

20 10

[2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18 [Turn over


4

Experiment 2

● Experiment 1 was repeated but using 3 g, 4 g, 6 g and 8 g of solid D .

(b) Use the thermometer diagrams to record the results in the table.

Calculate and record the temperature change in each case, including whether the temperature
increased (+) or decreased (–).

initial
temperature of
mass of thermometer temperature thermometer temperature
the solution
solid D / g diagram of the distilled diagram change / °C
after 1 min / °C
water / °C

30 30

3 25 25

20 20

30 30

4 25 25

20 20

30 30

6 25 25

20 20

30 40

8 25 35

20 30

[2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


5

(c) P
 lot the results for Experiments 1 and 2 on the grid. The (0,0) point has been plotted for you.
Draw two straight lines of best fit.
Clearly label your graphs.

15

10

5
temperature
change / °C

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
mass of solid added / g

–5

–10
[4]

(d) 
Use your graph to estimate the temperature change after 1 minute if 8 g of solid C were added
to 40 cm3 of distilled water.

Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

.............................. °C [2]

(e) What type of energy change occurs when solid D dissolves in water?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Suggest the temperature of the solution containing 8 g of solid D, if the solution were left for
2 hours.
Explain your answer.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18 [Turn over


6

(g) How would the temperature changes measured after 1 minute differ if the experiments were
repeated using 80 cm3 instead of 40 cm3 of distilled water in each case?

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(h) Suggest one change you could make to the experiments to obtain more accurate results.
Explain how this change would make the results more accurate.

change ........................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(i) Suggest how the reliability of the results could be checked.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 19]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


7

3 Two substances, solid E and solution F, were analysed. Solid E was iron(II) sulfate. Tests were
done on solid E and solution F.

tests on solid E

Complete the expected observations.

(a) Describe the appearance of solid E.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

Solid E was added to distilled water in a test-tube. The test-tube was shaken to dissolve solid E and
form solution E. Solution E was divided into four equal portions in four test-tubes.

(b) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added to the first portion of solution E.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate were added to the second portion of solution E.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the third portion of solution E.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) An excess of aqueous ammonia was added to the fourth portion of solution E.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18 [Turn over


8

tests on solution F

Solution  F was an aqueous salt solution.

Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solution F observations

Solution F was divided into two equal portions in


two test-tubes.

test 1

Drops of aqueous sodium hydroxide were added white precipitate formed


to the first portion of solution F.

An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was white precipitate was insoluble


then added to the mixture.

test 2

An excess of aqueous ammonia was added to no precipitate formed


the second portion of solution F.

(f) What conclusion can you draw about the cation present in solution F?

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


9

4 
Aqueous solutions of barium hydroxide are alkaline.
Plan an investigation to find the concentration of an aqueous solution of barium hydroxide.

You are provided with an aqueous solution of barium hydroxide, dilute hydrochloric acid of known
concentration and common laboratory apparatus.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/M/J/18


Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8057635515*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2019
 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB19 06_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2019 [Turn over
2

1 The names of eight substances are given.

aluminium oxide calcium oxide ethanol nitrogen

iron(III) oxide methane oxygen silicon(IV) oxide

Answer the following questions about these substances.


Each substance may be used once, more than once or not at all.

State which substance is:

(a) the main constituent of natural gas

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) a reactant in respiration

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) the main constituent of bauxite

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) a product of photosynthesis

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) a greenhouse gas

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) a macromolecular solid.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 6]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


3

11Na, 11Na and 11Na are isotopes of sodium.


22 23 24
2 (a) 

(i) Describe how these sodium isotopes are the same and how they are different in terms of
the total number of protons, neutrons and electrons in each.

same ....................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

different ................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................
[3]

(ii) Why do all three isotopes have an overall charge of zero?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Why do all three isotopes have the same chemical properties?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(iv) Why do sodium ions have a charge of +1?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Carbon is an element which exists in different forms.

(i) Name two forms of the element carbon that have giant covalent structures.

............................................................... and ............................................................... [1]

(ii) Name the oxide of carbon that is a toxic gas.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 9]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19 [Turn over


4

3 This question is about phosphorus and compounds of phosphorus.

(a) Phosphorus has the formula P4. Some properties of P4 are shown.

melting point / °C 45
boiling point / °C 280
electrical conductivity non-conductor
solubility in water insoluble

(i) Name the type of bonding that exists between the atoms in a P4 molecule.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Explain, in terms of attractive forces between particles, why P4 has a low melting point.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Explain why phosphorus is a non-conductor of electricity.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

Phosphorus, P4, reacts with air to produce phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10.


(b) 

(i) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) What type of chemical reaction is this?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(c) Phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10, is an acidic oxide.

Phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10, reacts with aqueous sodium hydroxide to form a salt containing
the phosphate ion, PO43–. Water is the only other product.

Write a chemical equation for the reaction between phosphorus(V) oxide and aqueous
sodium hydroxide.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


5

(d) Phosphine has the formula PH3.

Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of


phosphine. Show outer shell electrons only.

H P H

[2]

(e) Phosphine, PH3, has a similar chemical structure to ammonia, NH3.

Ammonia acts as a base when it reacts with sulfuric acid.

(i) What is meant by the term base?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between ammonia and sulfuric acid.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

 [Total: 13]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19 [Turn over


6

4 Methanol is made industrially by reacting carbon monoxide with hydrogen. The gases react at a
temperature of 250 °C and a pressure of 75 atmospheres.

CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

(a) Suggest a source of hydrogen for this industrial process.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Complete the table using only the words increases, decreases or no change.

effect on the rate effect on the equilibrium


of the reverse reaction yield of CH3OH(g)

adding a catalyst no change

increasing the temperature increases

decreasing the pressure


[4]

(c) Methanol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.

(i) State two general characteristics of a homologous series.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Draw the structures of two different alcohols, each containing three carbon atoms. Show
all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

Name these two alcohols.

name ...................................................... name ......................................................

[4]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


7

(iii) What term is used to describe compounds with the same molecular formula but different
structural formulae?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) Alcohols react with carboxylic acids to produce esters.

(i) The structure of ester X is shown.

O
H C H H

O C C H

H H

Name ester X.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Give the name of the carboxylic acid and the alcohol that react together to produce ester X.

carboxylic acid .....................................................................................................................

alcohol .................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) Ester  Y is different from ester X but also has the formula C3H6O2.

Draw the structure of ester Y. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

 [Total: 17]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19 [Turn over


8

5 Copper(II) sulfate crystals, CuSO4.5H2O, are hydrated.

Copper(II) sulfate crystals are made by reacting copper(II) carbonate with dilute sulfuric acid.

The equation for the overall process is shown.

CuCO3 + H2SO4 + 4H2O CuSO4.5H2O + CO2

step 1 Powdered solid copper(II) carbonate is added to 50.0 cm3 of 0.05 mol / dm3 sulfuric acid


until the copper(II) carbonate is in excess.

step 2 The excess of copper(II) carbonate is separated from the aqueous copper(II) sulfate.

step 3 The aqueous copper(II) sulfate is heated until the solution is saturated.

step 4 The solution is allowed to cool and crystallise.

step 5 The crystals are removed and dried.

Calculate the maximum mass of the copper(II) sulfate crystals, CuSO4.5H2O, that can form
(a) 
using the following steps.

●● Calculate the number of moles of H2SO4 in 50.0 cm3 of 0.05 mol / dm3 H2SO4.

 .............................. mol

●● Determine the number of moles of CuSO4.5H2O that can form.

 .............................. mol

●● The Mr of CuSO4.5H2O is 250.

Calculate the maximum mass of CuSO4.5H2O that can form.

 .............................. g
[3]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


9

(b) Steps 1–5 were done correctly but the mass of crystals obtained was less than the maximum
mass.

Explain why.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) State two observations that would indicate that the copper(II) carbonate is in excess in step 1.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(d) When the reaction in step 1 is done using lumps of copper(II) carbonate instead of powder,
the rate of reaction decreases. All other conditions are kept the same.

Give a reason for this. Explain your answer in terms of particles.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) Name a different substance, other than copper(II) carbonate, that could be added to dilute
sulfuric acid to produce copper(II) sulfate in step 1.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

Name the process used to separate the aqueous copper(II) sulfate from the excess of
(f) 
copper(II) carbonate in step 2.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

The solution of aqueous copper(II) sulfate was heated until it was saturated in step 3.
(g) 

(i) Suggest what is meant by the term saturated solution.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) What evidence would show that the solution was saturated in step 3?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Why should the aqueous copper(II) sulfate not be heated to dryness in step 3?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 14]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19 [Turn over


10

6 The halogens are the elements in Group VII of the Periodic Table.

(a) Predict the physical state and colour of astatine at room temperature and pressure.

physical state ..............................................................................................................................

colour ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) When chlorine reacts with aqueous potassium bromide a displacement reaction occurs.

(i) Describe the colour change of the solution.

from .............................................................. to .................................................................


[2]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) Reactions occur when some aqueous solutions of halogens are added to aqueous solutions of
halides.

Use the key to complete the table to show the results of adding halogens to halides.

key
= reaction
= no reaction

halides
KCl (aq) KBr(aq) KI(aq)

Cl 2(aq) 
halogens

Br2(aq)

I2(aq)
[2]

 [Total: 8]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


11

7 (a) Displacement reactions occur between metals and metal ions.

Displacement reactions can be used to determine the order of reactivity of metals such as
lead (Pb), nickel (Ni), and silver (Ag).

The ionic equation for a displacement reaction is shown.

Ni(s) + Pb2+(aq) Pb(s) + Ni2+(aq)

The ionic half-equations for this reaction are shown.

Ni(s) Ni2+(aq) + 2e–

Pb2+(aq) + 2e– Pb(s)

The ionic half-equations show that electrons are donated by nickel atoms and accepted by
lead ions.

(i) Identify the reducing agent in the displacement reaction. Give a reason for your answer.

reducing agent......................................................................................................................

reason...................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) What is the general term given to the type of reaction in which electrons are transferred
from one species to another?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) The ionic equation for another displacement reaction is shown.

Pb(s) + 2Ag+(aq) 2Ag(s) + Pb2+(aq)

Write the two ionic half-equations for this reaction.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Use the information in (a) and (b) to put the three metals lead, nickel and silver in order of
reactivity.

most reactive

least reactive
[1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19 [Turn over


12

(d) Nickel is a transition element. Nickel is stronger than sodium.

Describe two other differences in the physical properties of nickel and sodium.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(e) Predict one difference in the appearance of aqueous solutions of nickel compounds compared
to aqueous solutions of sodium compounds.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Copper is refined (purified) by electrolysis. Nickel can be refined using a similar method.

(i) The diagram shows the refining of nickel by electrolysis.

Complete the labels in the boxes.

power
supply

+ –
anode made of cathode made of
.......................................... ..........................................

electrolyte of

..........................................
[3]

(ii) Indicate, by writing N on the diagram, where nickel is produced. [1]

 [Total: 13]

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2019
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/M/J/19
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*0271487183*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical May/June 2019
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 8 printed pages and 4 blank pages.

IB19 06_0620_62/3RP
© UCLES 2019 [Turn over
2

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


3

1 A student did the following steps to make zinc chloride crystals from solid zinc oxide.

step 1 Pour 40  cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid into a beaker. Add a small amount of zinc oxide.
Warm the mixture and stir it.
step 2 Continue to add zinc oxide to the beaker until all of the dilute hydrochloric acid has
reacted.
step 3 Remove the excess zinc oxide.
step 4 Obtain crystals of zinc chloride from the solution.

(a) Name the apparatus used in step 1 to:

(i) add the zinc oxide

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) warm the mixture.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) How did the student know that all of the dilute hydrochloric acid had reacted in step 2?

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) (i) What is meant by the term excess in step 3?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) How is the excess zinc oxide removed in step 3?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) Describe how the crystals are obtained in step 4.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(e) Suggest how the method would differ if zinc carbonate were used instead of zinc oxide.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 9]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19 [Turn over


4

2 A student investigated the rate of reaction between magnesium ribbon and solutions of dilute
hydrochloric acid of different concentrations, solutions H, I, J and K. The dilute hydrochloric acid
was in excess in all experiments.

Five experiments were done.


Experiment 1
●● A measuring cylinder was used to pour 30 cm3 of solution H into a beaker.
●● A 5.0 cm length of magnesium ribbon was then added to the beaker.
●● A timer was started immediately.
●● The time taken for all of the magnesium ribbon to react and to disappear completely was
measured.


Experiment 2
●● Experiment 1 was repeated but using solution I instead of solution H.


Experiment 3
●● Experiment 1 was repeated but using solution J instead of solution H.

Experiment 4
●● Experiment 1 was repeated but using solution K instead of solution H.

(a) Use the stop-clock diagrams to record the time taken for each experiment in the table.

concentration of time taken for the


stop-clock
experiment solution hydrochloric acid magnesium ribbon to
diagram
in mol / dm3 disappear completely / s

45 15 5 15
1 H 2.0

10
minutes

45 15 5 15
2 I 1.5

10

45 15 5 15
3 J 1.0

10

45 15 5 15
4 K 0.8

10

[3]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


5

Experiment 5
Solution J was added to some magnesium ribbon in a test‑tube. The gas produced was tested. The
observations were recorded in the table.

rapid effervescence and the test-tube felt hot


observations
lighted splint ‘popped’

(b) Plot the results for Experiments 1–4 on the grid. Draw a smooth line graph.

time taken for the


magnesium ribbon to
disappear completely / s

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0


concentration of hydrochloric acid in mol / dm 3

[3]

(c) 
From your graph, deduce the time taken for the magnesium ribbon to disappear completely
if a solution of hydrochloric acid of concentration 2.5 mol / dm3 were used.

Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19 [Turn over


6

(d) (i) Why was the same length of magnesium used in Experiments 1–4?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest the effect on the results if Experiments 1–4 were repeated using 2.5 cm lengths of
magnesium ribbon instead of 5.0 cm lengths of magnesium ribbon. Explain your answer.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(e) Suggest a different method which a student could use to investigate the rate of reaction
between magnesium ribbon and dilute hydrochloric acid. State the apparatus the student
would use and the measurements the student would take.

apparatus ....................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

measurements ............................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

(f) Use the observations from Experiment 5 to answer these questions.

(i) 
What type of chemical reaction occurs when magnesium ribbon reacts with dilute
hydrochloric acid?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Identify the gas produced.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 16]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


7

3 Two substances, solid L and solid M, were analysed. Solid L was hydrated ammonium sulfate.
Tests were done on solid L and solid M.

tests on solid L

Complete the expected observations.

(a) Describe the appearance of solid L.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

Solid  L was divided into two portions.

(b) T
 he first portion of solid L was heated in a hard-glass test-tube. Any gas produced was tested
with cobalt(II) chloride paper.

observations ...............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

The second portion of solid L was added to distilled water. The mixture was shaken to dissolve
solid L and form solution L. The solution of L was divided into two equal portions in two test‑tubes.

(c) A
 n excess of aqueous sodium  hydroxide was added to the first portion of solution  L. The
mixture was heated and the gas produced was tested.

observations ...............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate were added to the second portion of solution L.

observation ........................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19 [Turn over


8

tests on solid M


Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solid M observations

Solid M was dissolved in water. The solution was


divided into three portions.

test 1

An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was red-brown precipitate formed


added to the first portion of the solution.

test 2

An excess of aqueous ammonia was added to the red-brown precipitate formed


second portion of the solution.

test 3

Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were white precipitate formed


added to the third portion of the solution.

(e) Identify solid  M.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

 [Total: 9]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


9

4 Azurite is an ore of copper which contains copper(II) carbonate. Azurite contains no other metal
ions.

Plan an experiment to show how a sample of copper could be obtained from large lumps of azurite.

Your answer should include:

●●  escriptions of the reactions involved


d
●● the expected observations.

You are provided with a large lump of azurite and common laboratory chemicals and apparatus.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2019 0620/62/M/J/19


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4078903609*

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 20.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB14 11_0620_22/2RP
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
2

1 (a) The electronic structure of five atoms, A, B, C, D and E, are shown below.

A B C D E

Answer the following questions about these structures.


Each structure can be used once, more than once or not at all.

Which structure:

(i) represents an atom of an element in Group V of the Periodic Table, ........................... [1]

(ii) has a complete outer shell of electrons, ....................................................................... [1]

(iii) represents an oxygen atom, ......................................................................................... [1]

(iv) has a proton number of 20, .......................................................................................... [1]

(v) is an atom of an element in Period 4 of the Periodic Table, ......................................... [1]

(vi) has a single valency electron? ..................................................................................... [1]

(b) Complete the following sentences about isotopes using words from the list below.

atoms ions molecules neutrons nuclei protons

Isotopes are .......................... of the same element with the same number of ..........................

but different numbers of .......................... . [3]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


3

2 The table below shows some nutritional information on a bottle of apple juice.

mass present
contents
in g / 100 cm3
protein 0.10
sugars 10.40
unsaturated fat 0.10
saturated fat 0.06
chloride ions, Cl – 0.04
magnesium ions, Mg2+ 0.01
nitrate ions, NO3– 0.01
potassium ions, K+ 0.02
sodium ions, Na+ 0.05
X, SO42– 0.01

(a) Answer these questions using information from the table.

(i) Which negatively charged ion is present in the highest concentration?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the name of the ion, X, whose formula is SO42–.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The formulae for some chlorides are shown below.

aluminium chloride, Al Cl 3
calcium chloride, CaCl 2
lead(IV) chloride, PbCl 4
potassium chloride, KCl

Deduce the formula for magnesium chloride.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Calculate the mass of sugars in 250 cm3 of this apple juice.

................... g [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


4

(b) The fats in the apple juice are both saturated and unsaturated.
Describe a test to distinguish between saturated and unsaturated compounds.

test .............................................................................................................................................

result with saturated compound .................................................................................................

result with unsaturated compound .............................................................................................


[3]

(c) Apple juice is slightly acidic.

(i) Which one of the following pH values is slightly acidic?


Put a ring around the correct answer.

pH 1 pH 5 pH 7 pH 9 pH 14
[1]

(ii) One of the acids found in apple juice is malic acid.


The structure of malic acid is shown below.

O O
C

H C O H

H C H

C
O O

On the structure of malic acid above, put a ring around a carboxylic acid functional
group. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


5

3 Hydrogen chloride gas can be prepared by the action of concentrated sulfuric acid on sodium
chloride.

H2SO4 + 2NaCl → Na2SO4 + 2HCl

(a) Write the word equation for this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Hydrogen chloride dissolves in water to form hydrochloric acid.

(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the arrangement of the outer shell electrons
in water.

H H

[2]

(ii) Describe what you would observe when a few drops of silver nitrate solution are added to
hydrochloric acid.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


6

(c) The graph below shows how pH changes when aqueous ammonia is neutralised by hydrochloric
acid.

14

12

10

pH

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
volume of hydrochloric acid added / cm3

(i) What is the pH of the aqueous ammonia at the start of the experiment?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What volume of hydrochloric acid has been added when the pH is 10?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) What volume of hydrochloric acid has been added when the pH is changing most quickly?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


7

(d) Concentrated hydrochloric acid reduces manganese(IV) oxide, MnO2, to manganese(II)


chloride.

4HCl + MnO2 → MnCl 2 + Cl 2 + 2H2O

How does this equation show that manganese(IV) oxide gets reduced?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(e) The table shows some properties of four metals, A, B, C and D, and their oxides.

density boiling point charge on the


metal colour of oxide
in g / cm3 / °C metal ion

A 2.99 2831 white 3+


B 0.53 1342 white 1+
C 7.86 2750 black or red-brown 2+ or 3+
D 7.14 907 white 2+

Which one of these metals is a transition metal?


Use the information in the table to explain your answer.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


8

4 Calcium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.

(a) Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

CaCO3 + ......HCl → CaCl 2 + CO2 + ............


[2]

(b) The rate of this reaction can be followed using the apparatus shown below.

cotton wool
A

hydrochloric acid
calcium carbonate

(i) State the names of the pieces of apparatus labelled A and B.

A .........................................................................................................................................

B .........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Explain why the mass of the reaction mixture decreases with time.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


9

(c) The graph below shows how the mass of the reaction mixture changes with time.
The calcium carbonate was in excess and large pieces of calcium carbonate were used.

100.25

100.20

100.15
mass of
reaction
mixture / g
100.10

100.05

100.00
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
time / s

(i) At what time was the reaction just complete?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the total loss in mass of the reaction mixture in this experiment.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) How does the rate of reaction change when:

smaller pieces of calcium carbonate are used,

.............................................................................................................................................

the temperature is decreased,

.............................................................................................................................................

the concentration of hydrochloric acid is decreased?

.............................................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


10

(d) When heated, calcium carbonate breaks down to form calcium oxide and carbon dioxide.

Which two words from the list below describe this reaction?
Tick two boxes.

combustion

decomposition

endothermic

exothermic

oxidation [2]

(e) Calcium oxide is used in flue-gas desulfurisation.

(i) Explain how flue-gas desulfurisation works.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Give one other use of calcium oxide.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


11

5 The structures of graphite and sodium chloride are shown below.

C C
C C C
C C C
C C
C C
C C
C
Cl – Na+ Cl – Na+
C C C

Na+ Cl – Na+ Cl –
C C
C
C C
C C
C C
C
Cl – Na+ Cl – Na+
C C C C
C C C C
C C C C

graphite sodium chloride

(a) Describe the similarity and differences in these structures.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Graphite is a form of carbon.


Carbon is an element.

(i) What is meant by the term element ?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Write a symbol equation for the complete combustion of carbon.

[2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


12

(c) The table shows some properties of four substances, A, B, C and D.

melting point boiling point


substance electrical conductivity
/ °C / °C

A –7 +59 does not conduct


B –157 –152 does not conduct
C +769 +1930 conducts when molten but not when solid
D +1410 +2355 does not conduct

Which one of these substances, A, B, C or D,

(i) is a liquid at room temperature, .................................................................................... [1]

(ii) is a giant ionic structure, ............................................................................................... [1]

(iii) is a noble gas, .............................................................................................................. [1]

(iv) is a giant covalent structure? ........................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


13

6 The table below shows some properties of the first five members of the alkane homologous series.

molecular boiling point density of the liquid


alkane
formula / °C alkane in g / cm3

methane CH4 –164 0.47


ethane C 2 H6 –88
propane C 3 H8 –42 0.59
butane C4H10 0 0.60
pentane +36 0.63

(a) (i) What do you understand by the term homologous series ?

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Deduce the molecular formula for pentane.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Describe how the boiling points of these alkanes change as the number of carbon atoms
increases.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Deduce the density of liquid ethane.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Methane is a fuel which is a gas at room temperature.


State the name of a fuel which is:

a solid at room temperature, ......................................................................................................

a liquid at room temperature. .....................................................................................................


[2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


14

(c) The diagram below shows a distillation column used to separate petroleum into different
fractions.

(i) On the diagram above:

● put a letter X to show where the temperature in the column is lowest,


● put a letter F to show where the fraction containing the largest molecules is collected,
● put a letter M to show where petroleum enters the distillation column.
[3]

(ii) The refinery gas fraction contains ethane.


Hydrogen is one of the products formed when ethane is cracked.
Complete the symbol equation for the cracking of ethane.

C2H6 → .................... + ....................


[2]

(iii) State the conditions needed for cracking.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


15

7 Gallium and aluminium are in Group III of the Periodic Table.

(a) The melting point of gallium is 30 °C.


Use the kinetic particle theory to explain what happens when a spoon made of gallium is put
into a cup of tea at 40 °C.

In your answer, refer to:

● the change of state which occurs,


● the change in the arrangement of the particles,
● the change in the motion of the particles.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Gallium burns in air at a high temperature to form gallium(III) oxide.


Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

......Ga + 3O2 → ......Ga2O3


[2]

(c) Explain why aluminium is often used in containers for food and drinks.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14 [Turn over


16

(d) Aluminium chloride can be made by heating aluminium foil in a stream of chlorine.

aluminium foil

chlorine

aluminium chloride

(i) On the diagram above, draw an arrow to show where heat should be applied. [1]

(ii) At temperatures between 178 °C and 400 °C, aluminium chloride has the structure shown
below.

Cl Cl Cl
Al Al
Cl Cl Cl

Deduce the molecular formula of this structure.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Some properties of aluminium and silver are shown in the table below.

density electrical melting point


cost
in g / cm3 conductivity / °C

aluminium high 2.7 good 660


silver very high 10.5 very good 962

Use the information in the table to suggest why aluminium rather than silver is used in
overhead power cables.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


17

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2014 0620/22/O/N/14


© UCLES 2014
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
20

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

0620/22/O/N/14
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.


133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included the
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7994315301*

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of this page.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB15 11_0620_22/2RP
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
2

1 The structures of six substances are shown below.

A B C

Ag Ag Ag Ag Fe Fe Fe Ni Na+ I– Na+ I–
Ag Ag Ag Fe Ni Fe Fe
I– Na+ I– Na+
Ag Ag Ag Ag Ni Fe Fe Fe
Na+ I– Na+ I–

D E F

F F N
F N Xe
O O Xe
F F O O
N Xe
F F F O O Xe Xe

Answer the following questions about these substances.


Each substance may be used once, more than once or not at all.

(a) Which substance, A, B, C, D, E or F,

(i) is a simple molecular compound, .......................... [1]

(ii) is an alloy, .......................... [1]

(iii) is a compound, whose aqueous solution gives a yellow


precipitate on addition of aqueous silver nitrate, .......................... [1]

(iv) is an atmospheric pollutant arising from reactions taking


place in car engines, .......................... [1]

(v) is a diatomic molecule, .......................... [1]

(vi) conducts electricity when molten but not when solid? .......................... [1]

(b) Substance A is an element.

What is meant by the term element ?

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Substance D oxidises water to oxygen.

Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

2F2 + 2H2O → .......HF + ...............


[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


3

2 A student measured the highest temperature reached when four different fuels were burned. He
used the apparatus shown below.

thermometer

clamp

copper can
water

spirit burner
fuel

(a) The same amount of each fuel was burned.

Suggest two other things which the student should keep constant to make the experiment a
fair test.

1. ................................................................................................................................................

2. ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Is burning an exothermic or an endothermic reaction?


Give a reason for your answer.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The table below shows the results.

molecular initial final


fuel
formula temperature / °C temperature / °C
ethanol C 2 H 6O 23 44

hexane C6H14 17 46

pentane C5H12 22 48

propanol C 3 H 8O 21 45

(i) Which fuel gave the highest temperature change?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Which fuel has the highest relative molecular mass?


You are not expected to do any calculations.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


4

(d) Methane is a fuel.

(i) Draw the structure of methane showing all atoms and all bonds.

[1]

(ii) Which one of the following fuels is largely methane?


Tick one box.

coal

fuel oil

gasoline

natural gas
[1]

(e) Pentane and hexane belong to the same homologous series.

(i) How can you tell this from their names?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Complete the following sentence about a homologous series using words from the list
below.

acidic alcohol compounds density different

elements functional masses properties solid

A homologous series is a family of similar ........................... with similar ...........................

due to the presence of the same ........................... group.


[3]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


5

3 The order of reactivity of zinc, magnesium, calcium and barium is shown below.

zinc → magnesium → calcium → barium

least reactive most reactive

(a) Equal-sized pieces of zinc, magnesium, calcium and barium are placed in water.
Some observations from these reactions are shown in the table.

(i) Complete the box for barium.

metal observations

zinc no reaction with cold water

magnesium gives a few bubbles with hot water, does not disappear

calcium gives off bubbles steadily with cold water, gets smaller slowly

barium

[2]

(ii) Give the name of a metal in the above table which is extracted by heating with carbon.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Suggest why barium cannot be extracted using carbon.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Barium can be extracted by heating barium oxide with aluminium.

4BaO + 2Al → 3Ba + BaAl 2O4

How does this equation show that barium oxide gets reduced?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) A solution of barium hydroxide is alkaline.

(i) Describe how you would show that barium hydroxide solution is alkaline.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Complete the word equation for the reaction of barium hydroxide with hydrochloric acid.

.........................
barium hydrochloric
+ → + .........................
hydroxide acid
.........................
[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


6

(d) A student used the apparatus shown below to calculate the concentration of barium hydroxide
solution.

hydrochloric acid

barium hydroxide solution

(i) Give the name of the piece of apparatus labelled A.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The hydrochloric acid is added to the barium hydroxide solution in the flask until the acid
is in excess.

Describe how the pH of the solution changes as the acid is added.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) Complete the diagram below for the electrolysis of molten zinc chloride.
Label the electrodes and the power source.

molten
zinc chloride

[3]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


7

4 A student investigated the reaction of lumps of iron with sulfuric acid.

Fe(s) + H2SO4(aq) → FeSO4(aq) + H2(g)

She used the apparatus shown below.

water

sulfuric acid lumps of


iron

(a) (i) Describe how this apparatus can be used to investigate the rate of this reaction.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Describe how the rate of reaction would differ if smaller lumps of iron were used.
All other conditions remain the same.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The student investigated the effect of temperature on the reaction rate.

(i) State three factors which the student should keep the same in each experiment.

1. .........................................................................................................................................

2. .........................................................................................................................................

3. .........................................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


8

(ii) The table shows how the rate of reaction changed with temperature.

temperature rate of reaction


/ °C in cm3 / s
20 2.2

30 4.4

40 8.8

50 17.6

Use the information in the table to describe how the rate of reaction changed with
temperature.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Iron(II) sulfate can be prepared by adding excess iron to sulfuric acid.

Describe how you could obtain pure dry crystals of iron(II) sulfate from the reaction mixture in
the conical flask.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


9

5 A crystal of sulfur melts when heated.

(a) Explain, using the kinetic particle theory, the differences between the arrangement and motion
of the particles in sulfur crystals and liquid sulfur.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(b) Sulfur dioxide is an atmospheric pollutant.

(i) Describe how sulfur dioxide is formed and how it gets into the atmosphere.

.............................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) What type of oxide is sulfur dioxide?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Flue gas desulfurisation removes sulfur dioxide from exhaust gases in factories.

Describe the process of flue gas desulfurisation.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Sulfur dioxide is also formed when copper is reduced by hot concentrated sulfuric acid.

Complete the symbol equation for this reaction.

Cu + ......H2SO4 → CuSO4 + SO2 + ......H2O


[2]

(c) Copper is a metal.

Give two physical properties which are characteristic of all metals.

1. ................................................................................................................................................

2. ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


10

(d) The table below gives some properties of some metals that are used to make electrical cables
and wires.

electrical melting point price


metal strength
conductivity / °C $ / kg
aluminium comparatively weak good 660 1.5

copper strong very good 1093 29

steel strong fairly good 1535 2.1

silver fairly strong very good 962 635

(i) Suggest why aluminium with a steel core is used for overhead power cables.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Copper is used in electrical wiring in the home rather than silver.

Suggest why.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 16]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


11

6 Geraniol is a chemical found in rose petals.


The structure of geraniol is shown below.

CH3 H CH3

C C CH2 CH2 C C CH2 OH

CH3 H

(a) (i) On the structure above, put a ring around the alcohol functional group. [1]

(ii) Is geraniol a saturated or an unsaturated compound?


Give a reason for your answer.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Geraniol can be extracted from rose petals by steam distillation using the apparatus shown
below. The geraniol is carried off in small droplets with the steam.

X
rose petals
and water

geraniol

heat water

(i) Give the name of the piece of apparatus labelled A.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The vapour at point X is a mixture of geraniol and steam.

Give one property of a mixture which distinguishes it from a compound.

.............................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The geraniol and water are collected in the beaker.

What information in the diagram above shows that geraniol is less dense than water?

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


12

(c) Geraniol can also be extracted from rose petals by grinding the petals in ethanol.

(i) Draw the structure of ethanol showing all atoms and all bonds.

[1]

(ii) Complete the word equation for the complete combustion of ethanol.

ethanol + oxygen → .................................................. + ........................


[2]

(d) What is the percentage by volume of oxygen in the air?

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


13

7 Beryllium is in Group II and Period 2 of the Periodic Table.

(a) Describe the structure of a beryllium atom.


In your answer, refer to

• the type and number of each subatomic particle present,


• the charges on each type of subatomic particle,
• the position of each type of subatomic particle in the atom.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [5]

(b) Part of the structure of beryllium chloride is shown below.

Cl Cl Cl
Be Be Be
Cl Cl Cl

Deduce the simplest formula for beryllium chloride.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Beryllium carbide, Be2C, reacts with water. Beryllium hydroxide and methane are formed.

Be2C + 4H2O → 2Be(OH)2 + CH4

(i) Calculate the relative formula mass of beryllium hydroxide.

[2]

(ii) Describe one adverse effect of methane on the environment.

....................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2015 0620/22/O/N/15


© UCLES 2015
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

the live examination series.


Group
I II III IV V VI VII 0
1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2

7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84

K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon

0620/22/O/N/15
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89

140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
*58-71 Lanthanoid series
Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
90-103 Actinoid series Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
Key X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b b = proton (atomic) number 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2016

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*3303892045*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 20.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB16 11_0620_22/6RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 ‘Particles moving very slowly from an area of higher concentration to an area of lower
concentration.’

Which process is being described?

A a liquid being frozen


B a solid melting
C a substance diffusing through a liquid
D a substance diffusing through the air

2 A student mixes 25 cm3 samples of dilute hydrochloric acid with different volumes of aqueous
sodium hydroxide.

In each case, the student measures the change in temperature to test if the reaction is
exothermic.

Which piece of apparatus is not needed?

A B C D

burette clock pipette thermometer

3 A sample contains a mixture of powdered limestone (calcium carbonate), sugar and wax.

What is the correct way to obtain a pure sample of sugar?

A Dissolve the mixture in dilute hydrochloric acid, filter and wash the residue.
B Dissolve the mixture in hexane, filter and evaporate the filtrate.
C Dissolve the mixture in water, filter and evaporate the filtrate.
D Dissolve the mixture in water, filter and wash the residue.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


3

4 The table shows information about four different particles.

proton nucleon number number number


particle
number number of protons of neutrons of electrons

Na 11 23 11 W 11
Na+ 11 23 11 12 X
O 8 16 8 Y 8
O2– 8 16 8 8 Z

What are the values of W, X, Y and Z?

W X Y Z

A 11 10 10 8
B 11 11 8 10
C 12 10 8 10
D 12 11 10 8

5 In which ionic compound do the metal ion and the non-metal ion have the same electronic
structure?

A CaO B KBr C MgO D NaCl

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


4

6 The structure of methanal is shown.

C O

Which diagram shows the arrangement of outer shell electrons in a molecule of methanal?

A B

H H

C O C O

H H

C D

H H

C O C O

H H

7 Iron is a metal. Its structure consists of a giant lattice of positive ions in a ‘sea of electrons’.

Which statements about solid iron are correct?

1 Iron conducts electricity because the electrons are free to move.


2 Iron conducts heat because the positive ions are free to move.
3 Iron has a high melting point due to the strong covalent bonds.
4 Iron is malleable because the layers of ions can slide over one another.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 1 only D 2, 3 and 4

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


5

8 Which sample contains the greatest number of molecules?

A 4 g of hydrogen
B 18 g of water
C 24 dm3 of oxygen
D 66 g of carbon dioxide

9 Sodium carbonate solution reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid. The equation for the reaction is
shown.

Na2CO3(aq) + 2HCl (aq) → 2NaCl (aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

Excess sodium carbonate is added to 10.0 cm3 of 0.10 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid.

Which volume of carbon dioxide gas is made?

A 12 cm3 B 24 cm3 C 12 000 cm3 D 24 000 cm3

10 Which apparatus could be used to electroplate an iron nail with copper?

A B key

+ – + – = copper sheet

= iron nail

aqueous copper(II) sulfate

C D

+ – + –

aqueous iron(II) sulfate

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


6

11 A student sets up a number of simple cells by putting strips of two different metals into dilute
sulfuric acid.

Which cell produces the highest voltage?

A copper and magnesium


B copper and zinc
C iron and copper
D magnesium and zinc

12 Which experiment is the most exothermic?

initial final
temperature / °C temperature / °C

A 20 5
B 20 32
C 25 12
D 25 34

13 The energy level diagram for a reaction is shown.

Ea
reactants
energy
ΔH

products

Which row is correct?

sign of ∆H overall energy change sign of Ea

A – exothermic –
B + endothermic +
C + endothermic –
D – exothermic +

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


7

14 Zinc granules are reacted with excess dilute hydrochloric acid.

The volume of hydrogen given off is measured at different times.

The results are shown on the graph, labelled experiment 1.

The results for a second experiment are also shown on the graph, labelled experiment 2.

experiment 1
volume of
hydrogen

experiment 2

0
0 time

Which change to the conditions was made in experiment 2?

A The concentration of the hydrochloric acid was decreased.


B The size of the zinc granules was decreased.
C The surface area of the zinc granules was increased.
D The temperature was increased.

15 In an experiment nitric acid is added to excess marble chips and the volume of carbon dioxide
formed is measured.

The experiment is repeated using smaller marble chips. All other conditions remain the same.

Which statement about the second experiment is correct?

A The collisions are more frequent and higher energy.


B The collisions are more frequent and the same energy.
C The collisions are the same frequency and the same energy.
D The collisions are the same frequency and higher energy.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


8

16 At 400 °C the reaction between hydrogen and iodine reaches an equilibrium. The reaction is
exothermic.

H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI(g) ∆H = –13 kJ / mol

Which change in conditions would increase the percentage of hydrogen iodide in the equilibrium
mixture?

A a decrease in pressure
B a decrease in temperature
C an increase in pressure
D an increase in temperature

17 Chromium forms the compound chromium(III) sulfate.

What does the (III) represent?

A the charge on a sulfate ion


B the number of chromium ions combined with one sulfate ion
C the number of sulfate ions combined with one chromium ion
D the oxidation state of chromium

18 Germanium oxide is a white powder.

Germanium oxide reacts with concentrated hydrochloric acid.

Germanium oxide reacts with concentrated aqueous sodium hydroxide.

Germanium oxide does not dissolve when added to water.

Which type of oxide is germanium oxide?

A acidic
B amphoteric
C basic
D neutral

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


9

19 Hydrogen chloride gas reacts with water to produce an acidic solution. The equation for the
reaction is shown.

HCl + H2O → Cl – + H3O+

Which statement describes what happens during the reaction?

A The chloride ion is formed by accepting an electron from the water.


B The hydrogen chloride loses an electron to form the chloride ion.
C The water accepts a proton from the hydrogen chloride.
D The water donates a proton to the hydrogen chloride.

20 The apparatus shown is used to prepare aqueous copper(II) sulfate.

filter paper
stirrer
excess of solid X
solid X

Y aqueous
copper(II) sulfate

heat

What are X and Y?

X Y

A copper aqueous iron(II) sulfate


B copper(II) chloride sulfuric acid
C copper(II) oxide sulfuric acid
D sulfur aqueous copper(II) chloride

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


10

21 Information about some silver compounds is shown in the table.

compound formula solubility in water

silver carbonate Ag2CO3 insoluble


silver chloride AgCl insoluble
silver nitrate AgNO3 soluble
silver oxide Ag2O insoluble

Which equation shows a reaction which cannot be used to make a silver salt?

A AgNO3(aq) + HCl (aq) → AgCl (s) + HNO3(aq)

B Ag2O(s) + 2HNO3(aq) → 2AgNO3(aq) + H2O(l)

C Ag2CO3(s) + 2HNO3(aq) → 2AgNO3(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)

D 2Ag(s) + 2HCl (aq) → 2AgCl (s) + H2(g)

22 What is not a property of Group I metals?

A They are soft and can be cut with a knife.


B They react when exposed to oxygen in the air.
C They produce an acidic solution when they react with water.
D They react rapidly with water producing hydrogen gas.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


11

23 Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added slowly, until in excess, to separate solutions of
W, X, Y and Z.

The results are shown.

initial observation with final observation with excess


solution
aqueous sodium hydroxide aqueous sodium hydroxide

W white precipitate formed precipitate dissolves


X white precipitate formed no change
Y pale blue precipitate formed no change
Z green precipitate formed no change

Which row identifies the metal ions in the solutions?

metal ion in metal ion in metal ion in metal ion in


solution W solution X solution Y solution Z

A aluminium calcium copper(II) iron(II)


B aluminium calcium iron(II) copper(II)
C aluminium iron(II) calcium copper(II)
D calcium aluminium copper(II) iron(II)

24 Part of the Periodic Table is shown.

Which element has two electrons in its outer shell and three electron shells?

A B
C D

25 Impurities in iron obtained from the blast furnace include carbon, phosphorus and silicon.

Which impurities are removed from the molten iron as gases when it is made into steel?

A carbon and phosphorus


B carbon and silicon
C carbon only
D phosphorus and silicon

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


12

26 Y displaces X from its aqueous sulfate.

X does not displace W from its aqueous sulfate.

X displaces Z from its aqueous sulfate.

What is the order of reactivity of elements W, X, Y and Z?

most least
reactive reactive

A W X Y Z
B W Y X Z
C Z X Y W
D Z W Y X

27 Which statement about the industrial extraction of aluminium from aluminium oxide is correct?

A Aluminium is extracted by heating its oxide with carbon.


B Aluminium is extracted using electrolysis and is collected at the anode.
C Aluminium is extracted using platinum electrodes and direct current.
D Molten cryolite is used as a solvent for aluminium oxide.

28 The alloy brass is a mixture of copper and another metal.

Brass is used to make the pins of electrical plugs.

Copper is used to make electrical wiring.

Which row about brass is correct?

electrical
hardness other metal
conductivity

A harder than copper better than copper tin


B harder than copper worse than copper zinc
C softer than copper better than copper tin
D softer than copper worse than copper zinc

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


13

29 Air is a mixture of gases.

Which gas is present in the largest amount?

A argon
B carbon dioxide
C nitrogen
D oxygen

30 Which information about carbon dioxide and methane is correct?

carbon dioxide methane

A formed when vegetation decomposes   key


B greenhouse gas    = true
C present in unpolluted air    = false
D produced during respiration  

31 Boats made from steel can be protected from rusting by attaching blocks of a more reactive metal
to the hull of the boat.

block of a more
reactive metal

hull

Which statement is correct?

A Copper is used for the blocks because it does not react with water.
B Magnesium is not used for the blocks because it reacts with steel.
C The metal used for the blocks loses electrons more easily than steel.
D This form of protection from rusting is called galvanising.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


14

32 Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber process, using an iron catalyst.

N2 + 3H2 2NH3

It is not possible to obtain 100% yield.

What is the reason for this?

A A high pressure is used.


B Ammonia decomposes at high temperature.
C Some of the ammonia is recycled.
D The ammonia reacts with the catalyst.

33 Sulfuric acid is manufactured by a series of chemical reactions, one of which is catalysed by


vanadium(V) oxide.

What is the equation for the reaction catalysed by vanadium(V) oxide?

A S + O2 → SO2

B 2S + 3O2 → 2SO3

C 2SO2 + O2 → 2SO3

D SO3 + H2O → H2SO4

34 Which substance gives off carbon dioxide on heating?

A lime
B limestone
C limewater
D slaked lime

35 Petroleum is separated into fractions.

Which statement is not correct?

A Each fraction contains a mixture of hydrocarbon molecules.


B Fuel oil burns easily and is used as fuel in cars.
C Refinery gas is the fraction containing the smallest molecules.
D The fractions are separated depending on their boiling point range.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


15

36 Butane reacts as shown.

catalyst
butane butene + hydrogen
and heat

What is this type of reaction?

A combustion
B cracking
C polymerisation
D reduction

37 Substance Z has the following characteristics.

1 It burns in an excess of oxygen to form carbon dioxide and water.


2 It is oxidised by air to form a liquid smelling of vinegar.
3 It reacts with carboxylic acids to form esters.

What is substance Z?

A ethane
B ethanoic acid
C ethanol
D ethyl ethanoate

38 Ethanol is manufactured by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene and by fermentation.

Which row shows an advantage and a disadvantage of using the catalytic addition of steam to
ethene compared to fermentation?

advantage disadvantage

A fast the product is impure


B fast uses non-renewable materials
C the product is pure slow
D uses renewable materials slow

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16 [Turn over


16

39 Chloroethene, CH2=CHCl , can be polymerised.

Which diagram represents a section of the polymer?

A B

Cl H Cl H Cl H Cl Cl Cl Cl Cl Cl

C C C C C C C C C C C C

H H H H H H H H H H H H

C D

Cl H H H Cl H Cl H Cl H Cl H

C C C C C C C C C C C C

H H H H H H H Cl H Cl H Cl

40 Terylene is a synthetic polymer.

Which statement about Terylene is not correct?

A It contains amide linkages.


B It contains carbon and oxygen atoms.
C It is made from small units called monomers.
D It is formed by condensation polymerisation.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


17

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


19

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/22/O/N/16


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
20

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/O/N/16
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*5182765417*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2016


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB16 11_0620_42/4RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2

1 Particles behave differently when in different physical states.

(a) Solids have a fixed volume and a definite shape.


Gases have no fixed volume and take the shape of the container.

Describe the volume and shape of liquids.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) C
 omplete the table to show the separation, arrangement and movement of particles in each
physical state.

state separation of particles arrangement of particles movement of particles

solid

liquid touching one another randomly arranged move over one another

gas

[6]

(c) Name the following changes of state.

(i) Ice turning into water.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Solid carbon dioxide turning directly into gaseous carbon dioxide at room temperature.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


3

2 This question is about atoms, ions and isotopes.

(a) Define the term nucleon number.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Give the electronic structure of the following atom and ion.

Na ...............................................................................................................................................

P3– . .............................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) State one medical use of radioactive isotopes.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) What is meant by the term relative atomic mass?

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(e) Suggest why the relative atomic mass of chlorine is not a whole number.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


4

(f) Aluminium is a metal in Group III.

Describe the bonding in aluminium.


Include a labelled diagram and any appropriate charges in your answer.

[3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


5

3 Clean, dry air contains a small amount of carbon dioxide.

(a) The percentages of the other gases present in clean, dry air are shown in the table.

Complete the table by inserting the names of these gases.

name of gas percentage present


78

21

1
[2]

(b) Oxides of nitrogen are atmospheric pollutants which can cause acid rain.

Describe the formation of oxides of nitrogen and suggest how they can cause acid rain.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) Methane contributes to the greenhouse effect.

State two sources of methane.

1 .................................................................................................................................................

2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(d) Combustion and respiration add carbon dioxide to the atmosphere.

Name one natural process which removes carbon dioxide from the atmosphere.

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


6

4 Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid in some reactions but not in other reactions.

(a) Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid when reacted with copper(II)  oxide and with
copper(II) carbonate.

Describe what you would see if excess dilute nitric acid is added separately to solid samples
of copper(II) carbonate and copper(II) oxide followed by warming the mixtures.

copper(II) carbonate

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

copper(II) oxide

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................
[4]

(b) When dilute nitric acid is added to pieces of copper and heated, a reaction takes place and
copper(II) nitrate is formed.

(i) Part of the chemical equation for the reaction between copper and dilute nitric acid is
shown.

Complete the chemical equation by inserting the formula of copper(II) nitrate and balancing
the equation.

......Cu(s) + 8HNO3(aq) → .................................(aq) + 4H2O(l) + 2NO(g)


[2]

(ii) How is the reaction of dilute nitric acid with copper different from that of a typical metal with
a typical acid?

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


7

5 Chlorine, bromine and iodine are halogens.

(a) Chlorine can be made in the laboratory by heating manganese(IV) oxide with concentrated
hydrochloric acid.

MnO2(s) + 4HCl (aq) → MnCl 2(aq) + 2H2O(l) + Cl 2(g)

Calculate the volume of 8.00 mol / dm3 HCl (aq) needed to react with 3.48 g of MnO2.

• moles of MnO2 used

................................ mol

• moles of HCl needed

................................ mol

• volume of HCl needed

................................ cm3
[4]

(b) A student bubbled chlorine gas into a test-tube containing aqueous potassium bromide.

(i) Describe the colour change seen in the test-tube.

from ............................................................... to ................................................................


[2]

(ii) Complete the ionic equation for this reaction.

Include state symbols.

Cl 2(g) + ......Br –(aq) → ................ + ................


[3]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


8

(c) When one mole of bromine, Br2, reacts with one mole of propene, one organic product is
formed.

(i) Which part of the propene molecule reacts with bromine?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between bromine and propene?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) When one mole of chlorine, Cl 2, reacts with one mole of propane, a mixture of two structural
isomers is formed.

(i) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between chlorine and propane?

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain what is meant by the term structural isomers.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Draw the structure of two structural isomers formed when one mole of chlorine reacts with
one mole of propane.

[2]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


9

(e) Iodine forms an oxide which has the composition by mass: I, 76.0%; O, 24.0%.

(i) Use this information to determine the empirical formula of this oxide of iodine.

empirical formula ................................. [3]

(ii) The oxide of iodine in (e)(i) dissolves in water.

Predict and explain the effect of adding Universal Indicator to an aqueous solution of this
oxide of iodine.

effect on Universal Indicator ................................................................................................

explanation ..........................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 21]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


10

6 Aluminium is a very important metal.

Aluminium is extracted from its ore, bauxite, by electrolysis. Bauxite is an impure form of aluminium
oxide, Al 2O3.

(a) Describe how aluminium is extracted from bauxite. Include an ionic half-equation for the
reaction at each electrode.

description ..................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

ionic half-equation for the anode reaction ..................................................................................

ionic half-equation for the cathode reaction.................................................................................


[5]

(b) Explain why the anodes have to be replaced regularly.

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Give two uses of aluminium and give a reason why aluminium is suitable for each use.

use 1 . .........................................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................................

use 2 . .........................................................................................................................................

reason ........................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


11

Question 7 starts on the next page.

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


12

7 Proteins are a major constituent of food.

Proteins are polymers.

(a) What is a polymer?

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Proteins can be converted into amino acids.

(i) Name the type of chemical reaction which occurs when proteins are converted into amino
acids.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest a condition needed to convert proteins into amino acids.

. ...................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) A colourless mixture of amino acids was separated by chromatography.


Amino acid X has an Rf value of 0.8.
The chromatogram of the mixture after treatment with a locating agent is shown.

solvent front

baseline

(i) How is an Rf value calculated?

Rf =
[1]

(ii) On the diagram put a ring around the spot caused by amino acid X. [1]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


13

(iii) Describe how you would perform a chromatography experiment to produce the
chromatogram shown in (c). Assume you have been given the mixture of amino acids and
a suitable locating agent. You are provided with common laboratory apparatus.

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ............................................................................................................................................

. ...................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16 [Turn over


14

(d) When one molecule of an amino acid A combines with one molecule of another amino acid B,
two different dipeptide molecules could be formed.

Draw the structures of the two different dipeptide molecules.


Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.

amino acid A amino acid B

H O H O
N C N C

H O H H O H

[3]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2016
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/O/N/16
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*4951844726*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB17 11_0620_22/3RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 The diagram shows the arrangement of particles in the three states of matter.

P Q R

Solid carbon dioxide (dry ice) sublimes to gaseous carbon dioxide.

Which row describes the initial and final states?

initial final
state state

A P R
B Q P
C R P
D R Q

2 During an experiment a measurement is recorded in cm3.

Which apparatus is used?

A balance
B measuring cylinder
C stopclock
D thermometer

3 A student carried out paper chromatography on a mixture of amino acids.

The student sprayed the dried chromatogram with a locating agent.

What is the function of the locating agent?

A to dissolve the amino acids


B to form coloured spots with the amino acids
C to preserve the amino acids
D to stop the amino acids reacting

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


3

4 Which row describes silicon(IV) oxide?

has a is an conducts
giant structure acidic oxide electricity

A   
B   
C   
D   

5 Why do isotopes of the same element have the same chemical properties?

A They have the same nucleon number.


B They have the same number of electrons in the outer shell.
C They have the same number of neutrons in the nucleus.
D They have the same number of protons as neutrons.

6 Which dot-and-cross diagram shows the outer shell electron arrangement in a molecule of
carbon dioxide?

A B

O C O O C O

C D

O C O O C O

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17 [Turn over


4

7 The equation for the reaction between phosphorus and oxygen is shown.

xP4 + yO2 → zP2O5

Which values of x, y and z balance the equation?

x y z

A 1 5 2
B 1 10 2
C 2 5 2
D 2 10 1

8 The relative molecular mass of an alcohol is 88.

Its percentage composition by mass is: C, 54.5%; H, 9.1%; O, 36.4%.

Which row shows the empirical formula and molecular formula for this alcohol?

empirical formula molecular formula

A C2H4O C2H4O
B C2H4O C4H8O2
C C4H8O2 C4H8O2
D C4H8O2 C2H4O

9 Which statements about the electrolysis of concentrated copper(II) chloride are correct?

1 Electrons are transferred from the cathode to the copper(II) ions.

2 Electrons move round the external circuit from the cathode to the anode.
3 Chloride ions are attracted to the anode.
4 Hydroxide ions transfer electrons to the cathode.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 2 and 4

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


5

10 Which metal combination produces the highest voltage reading in the cells shown?

A B

V V

Fe Cu Zn Cu

C D

V V

Cu Cu Mg Cu

11 The equation for the combustion of methane is shown.

CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O

The energy change for the combustion of methane is –890 kJ / mol.

The bond energies are shown in the table.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

C–H +410
O=O +496
H–O +460

What is the bond energy of the C=O bond?

A +49 kJ / mol B +841 kJ / mol C +1301 kJ / mol D +1335 kJ / mol

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17 [Turn over


6

12 Which statement describes an exothermic reaction?

A The energy absorbed for bond breaking is greater than the energy released by bond
formation.
B The energy absorbed for bond breaking is less than the energy released by bond formation.
C The energy released by bond breaking is greater than the energy absorbed for bond
formation.
D The energy released by bond breaking is less than the energy absorbed for bond formation.

13 The mass of a beaker and its contents is plotted against time.

Which graph represents what happens when sodium carbonate reacts with an excess of dilute
hydrochloric acid in an open beaker?

A B C D

mass mass mass mass

0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time

14 Copper metal donates electrons to silver ions.

Zinc metal donates electrons to copper ions.

What is the strongest reducing agent?

A copper ions
B copper metal
C silver ions
D zinc metal

15 Four statements about the effect of increasing temperature on a reaction are shown.

1 The activation energy becomes lower.


2 The particles move faster.
3 There are more collisions between reacting particles.
4 There are more collisions which have energy greater than the activation energy.

Which statements are correct?

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 3 and 4 C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


7

16 The formation of sulfur trioxide from sulfur dioxide is a reversible reaction.

2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Which changes would increase the equilibrium yield of SO3?

1 increasing the pressure


2 lowering the temperature
3 decreasing the concentration of oxygen

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 only D 2 and 3 only

17 Some properties of four oxides are listed.

Oxide 1 reacts with both acids and alkalis to form salts.

Oxide 2 reacts with acids to form salts but does not react with alkalis.

Oxide 3 reacts with alkalis to form salts but does not react with acids.

Oxide 4 does not react with acids or alkalis.

Which row describes the oxides?

oxide 1 oxide 2 oxide 3 oxide 4

A amphoteric acidic basic neutral


B amphoteric basic acidic neutral
C neutral acidic basic amphoteric
D neutral basic acidic amphoteric

18 What is not a typical characteristic of acids?

A They react with alkalis producing water.


B They react with all metals producing hydrogen.
C They react with carbonates producing carbon dioxide.
D They turn blue litmus paper red.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17 [Turn over


8

19 Copper(II) sulfate can be prepared by adding excess copper(II) carbonate to sulfuric acid.

Why is an excess of copper(II) carbonate added?

A to ensure all the copper(II) carbonate has reacted


B to ensure all the sulfuric acid has reacted
C to increase the rate of reaction

D to increase the yield of copper(II) sulfate

20 Compound P reacts with hydrochloric acid to produce a gas that turns limewater milky.

What is P?

A sodium carbonate
B sodium chloride
C sodium hydroxide
D sodium sulfate

21 Which statement about nitrogen and phosphorus is not correct?

A Both are in the same group of the Periodic Table.


B Both are in the same period of the Periodic Table.
C Both are non-metals.
D Both have the same number of electrons in their outer shell.

22 Sodium and rubidium are elements in Group I of the Periodic Table.

Which statement is correct?

A Sodium atoms have more electrons than rubidium atoms.


B Sodium has a lower density than rubidium.
C Sodium has a lower melting point than rubidium.
D Sodium is more reactive than rubidium.

23 Which properties do the elements chromium, iron and vanadium have in common?

1 They all conduct electricity.


2 They, or their compounds, can act as catalysts.
3 They all form coloured compounds.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


9

24 Why is argon gas used to fill electric lamps?

A It conducts electricity.
B It glows when heated.
C It is less dense than air.
D It is not reactive.

25 What is a property of all metals?

A conduct electricity
B hard
C low melting points
D react with water

26 Aluminium is extracted from bauxite by electrolysis.

Which row shows the anode material and the anode reaction?

anode material anode reaction

A carbon Al 3+ + 3e– → Al
B carbon 2O2– → O2 + 4e–
C steel Al 3+ + 3e– → Al
D steel 2O2– → O2 + 4e–

27 Which statement about the metal zinc is not correct?

A It forms an oxide more readily than iron.


B It is manufactured by the electrolysis of zinc blende.
C It is used to make brass.
D It is used to prevent iron from rusting.

28 Calcium nitrate decomposes when it is heated.

What is the equation for the thermal decomposition of calcium nitrate?

A 2Ca(NO3)2 → 2CaO + O2 + 4NO2

B Ca(NO3)2 → Ca(NO2)2 + O2

C Ca(NO3)2 → Ca + O2 + 2NO2

D Ca(NO3)2 → Ca + 3O2 + N2

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17 [Turn over


10

29 The flow chart shows stages in the treatment of river water to produce drinking water.

river settling stage stage drinking


water tank X Y water

What occurs at stages X and Y?

X Y

A distillation chlorination
B distillation filtration
C filtration chlorination
D filtration distillation

30 An experiment to investigate the effect of galvanising iron is shown.

X Y
pure iron galvanised iron

air

water

The experiment is left for seven days.

What happens to the water level in tubes X and Y?

tube X tube Y

A falls rises
B no change no change
C rises falls
D rises no change

31 Which metal is used as a catalyst in the Haber process for the manufacture of ammonia?

A iron
B nickel
C platinum
D vanadium

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


11

32 Which process removes carbon dioxide from the atmosphere?

A combustion of fossil fuels


B decomposition of carbonates
C photosynthesis
D respiration

33 Which row shows the conditions used in the manufacture of sulfuric acid by the Contact process?

temperature pressure
catalyst
/ °C / atm

A 40 200 Fe
B 40 200 V2O5
C 400 2 Fe
D 400 2 V2O5

34 Some marble chips (calcium carbonate) are heated strongly and substances X and Y are formed.

Substance X is a white solid that reacts with water, giving out heat. Substance Y is a colourless
gas.

What are substances X and Y?

X Y

A calcium chloride oxygen


B calcium hydroxide carbon dioxide
C calcium oxide carbon dioxide
D calcium sulfate oxygen

35 The structures of four organic compounds are shown.

S T U V

H H H H H H H H H H

H C C C C H H C C H H C C H C C

H H H H H H H C C H H H

H H

Which compounds are unsaturated?

A S only B T and U C U only D V only

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17 [Turn over


12

36 Which statement is not correct?

A Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons.


B The main constituent of natural gas is ethane.
C The naphtha fraction of petroleum is used for making chemicals.
D When natural gas burns in air, carbon dioxide and water are formed.

37 X, Y and Z are three hydrocarbons.

X CH2=CH2 Y CH3–CH=CH2 Z CH3–CH2–CH=CH2

What do compounds X, Y and Z have in common?

1 They are all alkenes.


2 They are all part of the same homologous series.
3 They all have the same boiling point.

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

38 The diagram shows a reaction sequence.

X Y Z
carbon dioxide
butane ethene ethanol
and water

Which row names the processes X, Y and Z?

X Y Z

A cracking fermentation respiration


B cracking hydration combustion
C distillation fermentation respiration
D distillation hydration combustion

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


13

39 The structure of an ester is shown.

H H O H H

H C C C O C C H

H H H H

Which substances react to form this ester?

A ethanol and ethanoic acid


B ethanol and propanoic acid
C propanol and ethanoic acid
D propanol and propanoic acid

40 A polymer can be made from methyl propene.

H CH3

C C

H CH3

Which diagram shows the structure of the polymer?

A B
H CH3 H CH3 H CH3 H H H H H H

C C C C C C C C C C C C

H CH3 H CH3 H CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3

C D
H H CH3 CH3 CH3 H H CH3 H CH3 H CH3

C C C C C C C C C C C C

H H CH3 CH3 CH3 H H CH3 H CH3 H CH3

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/22/O/N/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/O/N/17
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*9307337210*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2017


1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

IB17 11_0620_42/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 (a) Dust particles in the air move around in a random way.

(i) What term describes the random movement of the dust particles?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Identify the particles in the air which cause the random movement of the dust particles.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(iii) Explain why the dust particles move in this way.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(b) When chlorine gas, Cl 2, is put into a gas jar, it spreads out to fill the gas jar.

When bromine gas, Br2, is put into a gas jar, it also spreads out to fill the gas jar.

The process takes longer for bromine gas than for chlorine gas.

gas jar

gas

start later

(i) What term describes the way that the gas particles spread out?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Use data from the Periodic Table to explain why bromine gas takes longer to fill a gas jar
than chlorine gas.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(iii) Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate at which the gas particles
spread out.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


3

2 (a) Complete the table to show the electronic structure of the atoms and ions.

electronic structure

F 2,7

Si

Ca2+

N3–
[3]

(b) Predict the formula of the compound formed between Ca2+ and N3–.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangements in the two ions present in
lithium chloride, LiCl.
Show outer shell electrons only. Include the charges on the ions.

[3]

(d) Sulfur dichloride, SCl 2, is a covalent compound. It has the structure Cl –S–Cl.

Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of


sulfur dichloride.
Show outer shell electrons only.

[3]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


4

(e) In terms of attractive forces, explain why LiCl has a higher melting point than SCl 2.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(f) Suggest the identity of a covalent compound with a higher melting point than LiCl.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 14]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


5

3 The chemical equation for the complete combustion of ethanol, C2H5OH, is shown.

C2H5OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 3H2O

The energy released when one mole of ethanol undergoes complete combustion is 1280 kJ.

Part of the energy level diagram for this reaction is shown.

X
C2H5OH + 3O2

energy

(a) Complete the energy level diagram to show


● the products of the reaction,
● the overall energy change of the reaction.
[3]

(b) What does X represent?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


6

(c) The chemical equation for the complete combustion of methanol, CH3OH, is shown.

2CH3OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 4H2O

The equation can be represented as shown.

2 H C O H + 3 O O 2 O C O + 4 H O H

Use the bond energies in the table to determine the energy change, ΔH, for the complete
combustion of one mole of methanol.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

C–H 410
C–O 360
O–H 460
O=O 500
C=O 805

● energy needed to break bonds

.............................. kJ

● energy released when bonds are formed

.............................. kJ

● energy change, ΔH, for the complete combustion of one mole of methanol

.............................. kJ / mol
[4]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


7

(d) Dodecane is an alkane containing 12 carbon atoms. Ethanol can be manufactured from
dodecane in a two-stage process.

In stage 1, each molecule of dodecane is converted into three molecules of ethene and one
molecule of another hydrocarbon.

(i) Name the process which occurs in stage 1.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction which occurs in stage 1.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

In stage 2, ethene reacts with steam to produce ethanol.

(iii) State two conditions needed for stage 2.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iv) Name the type of reaction which occurs in stage 2.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) Suggest how to test the purity of the ethanol produced.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


8

(e) Ethanol can also be manufactured by the fermentation of glucose, C6H12O6.

(i) State two conditions needed for the fermentation of glucose.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Complete the chemical equation for the fermentation of glucose.

C6H12O6 ......C2H5OH + ..............................


[2]

(iii) One disadvantage of fermentation is that the maximum concentration of ethanol produced
is about 15%.

Suggest why the concentration of ethanol produced by fermentation does not exceed
15%.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Give one other disadvantage of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(v) Give one advantage, other than cost, of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(vi) Suggest the name of a process to obtain ethanol from a mixture of ethanol and water.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


9

(f) Ethane-1,2-diol has the following structure.

H H

H O C C O H

H H

(i) Write the empirical formula of ethane-1,2-diol.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Ethane-1,2-diol can undergo condensation polymerisation but cannot undergo addition
polymerisation.

Explain why ethane-1,2-diol cannot undergo addition polymerisation.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Ethane-1,2-diol undergoes condensation polymerisation with molecule Y.

The diagrams represent the structures of ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.

O O

H O O H H O C C O H

ethane-1,2-diol molecule Y

Draw the condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.


Show one repeat unit. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkage.

[3]

(iv) Name the type of condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 30]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


10

4 A student sets up the following electrolysis experiment.

bulb

wire

+ –
graphite electrodes

dilute aqueous
sodium chloride

(a) Define the term electrolysis.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The student observes bubbles of colourless gas forming at each electrode.

(i) Name the main gas produced at the positive electrode (anode).

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Describe a test for the gas produced in (b)(i).

test .......................................................................................................................................

result ....................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) 
Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction taking place at the negative electrode
(cathode).

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(c) Charge is transferred during electrolysis.

Name the type of particle responsible for the transfer of charge in

the wires, ....................................................................................................................................

the electrolyte. ............................................................................................................................


[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


11

(d) 
The student replaces the dilute aqueous sodium chloride with concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride.

Suggest two differences that the student observes.

1 ..................................................................................................................................................

2 ..................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(e) The student has a small piece of impure copper. The main impurities in the copper are small
quantities of silver and zinc.

The student uses electrolysis to extract pure copper from the small piece of impure copper.

(i) Complete the labels on the diagram of the student’s electrolysis experiment.

anode made of cathode made of


+ –
......................................... .........................................

electrolyte of
.......................................................
[3]

(ii) Use your knowledge of the reactivity series to suggest what happens to the silver and zinc
impurities. Explain your answers.

silver impurities ....................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

zinc impurities ......................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 17]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


12

5 Some chemical reactions are reversible.

(a) Aqueous potassium chromate(VI), K2CrO4, is a yellow solution.

Aqueous potassium dichromate(VI), K2Cr2O7, is an orange solution.

The two compounds interconvert when the pH of the solution changes.

2K2CrO4 + H2SO4 K2Cr2O7 + K2SO4 + H2O


yellow orange

Solution Y is a mixture of aqueous potassium chromate(VI) and aqueous


potassium dichromate(VI) at equilibrium.

● Explain, in terms of the position of the equilibrium, what you would see if sulfuric acid were
added to solution Y.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

● Explain, in terms of the position of the equilibrium, what you would see if sodium hydroxide
were added to solution Y.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................
[5]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


13

(b) Hydrogen can be manufactured using a reversible reaction between methane and steam.

CH4(g) + H2O(g) CO(g) + 3H2(g)

At 900  °C, in the presence of a nickel catalyst, the yield of hydrogen is 70%.

(i) What volume of hydrogen is produced from 100 cm3 of methane under these conditions?

.............................. cm3 [2]

Under different conditions, different yields of hydrogen are obtained.

(ii) If the pressure is increased, the yield of hydrogen becomes less than 70%.

Explain why, in terms of the position of the equilibrium.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) If the temperature is decreased, the yield of hydrogen decreases.

What does this information indicate about the reaction between methane and steam?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Why is a catalyst used in this reaction?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17 [Turn over


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2017
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/O/N/17
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*1525169577*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2017


1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

IB17 11_0620_62/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2

1 Some magnesium ribbon was cleaned.


Steam was then passed over the magnesium ribbon as it was heated, using the apparatus shown.

.........................................
mineral wool magnesium ribbon

(a) What liquid is absorbed on the mineral wool?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) (i) Use two arrows to show two places where heat is applied. [1]

(ii) Complete the box to name the apparatus. [1]

(c) Suggest how the magnesium ribbon was cleaned.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) (i) Complete the diagram to show how the hydrogen produced could be collected and its
volume measured. Label your diagram. [2]

(ii) State the effect of a lighted splint on the hydrogen produced.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(e) Suggest why the tube containing the magnesium cracks after the reaction.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17


3

2 A student investigated what happened when two different solids, S and T, dissolved in water.

Two experiments were carried out.

Experiment 1

●  sing a measuring cylinder, 30 cm3 of distilled water were poured into a polystyrene cup. The
U
initial temperature of the water was measured.
● 2.0 g of solid S were added to the polystyrene cup and the solution was stirred with a
thermometer.
● The maximum temperature of the solution was measured.
● The solution was poured away and the polystyrene cup was rinsed out with distilled water.

●  he procedure was repeated using 3.0 g of solid S.


T
● The procedure was repeated using 5.0 g of solid S.

(a) Use the thermometer diagrams to record the temperatures in the table.

mass of thermometer initial temperature thermometer maximum temperature


solid S / g diagram of the water / °C diagram of the solution / °C

30 40

2.0 25 35

20 30

30 40

3.0 25 35

20 30

30 55

5.0 25 50

20 45
[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17 [Turn over


4

Experiment 2

●  xperiment 1 was repeated using 2.0 g, 3.0 g, 4.0 g and 6.0 g of solid T. The minimum
E
temperature of the solution was measured in each case.

(b) Use the thermometer diagrams to record the temperatures in the table.

mass of thermometer initial temperature thermometer minimum temperature


solid T / g diagram of the water / °C diagram of the solution / °C

30 25

2.0 25 20

20 15

30 20

3.0 25 15

20 10

30 20

4.0 25 15

20 10

30 20

6.0 25 15

20 10
[2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17


5

(c) P
 lot the results of Experiment  1 (maximum temperature) and Experiment  2 (minimum
temperature) on the grid. Draw two straight lines of best fit.
Clearly label your lines.

70

60

50

40
temperature of
the solution / °C

30

20

10

0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
mass of solid / g
[4]

(d) (i) From your graph, deduce the maximum temperature of the solution if 6.0 g of solid  S
were added to 30 cm3 of distilled water.

Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

.............................. °C [2]

(ii) 
From your graph, deduce the minimum temperature of the solution if 4.5 g of solid T were
added to 30 cm3 of distilled water.

Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

.............................. °C [2]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17 [Turn over


6

(e) Use the results to identify the type of energy change that occurs when solid S dissolves in
water.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Suggest one change you could make to the experiments to obtain more accurate results.
Explain how this change would make the results more accurate.

change ........................................................................................................................................

explanation .................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(g) Suggest how the reliability of the results could be checked.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(h) E
 xplain how the temperatures measured would be different if Experiment  1 were repeated
using 60 cm3 of distilled water in each case.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 18]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17


7

3 
Two solid salts, U and W, were analysed. Solid U was sodium carbonate.
Tests were carried out on each solid.

tests on solid U

Complete the expected observations.

(a) Describe the appearance of solid U.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

About half of solid U was dissolved in distilled water to produce solution U. Solution U was divided
into two equal portions in two test-tubes.

(b) Dilute hydrochloric acid was added to the first portion of solution U.
The gas produced was tested.

observations ...............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) Name the gas produced in (b).

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) A flame test was carried out on solid U.

observations.......................................................................................................................... [1]

tests on solid W

Tests were carried out and the following observations made.

tests on solid W observations


Appearance of solid W. white crystals

Solid W was dissolved in distilled water to produce


solution W. The solution was divided into two equal
portions in two test-tubes.

test 1

Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were added white precipitate formed
to the first portion of solution W.

test 2

The second portion of solution U was added to the white precipitate formed
second portion of solution W.

An excess of dilute hydrochloric acid was then added rapid effervescence


to the mixture. white precipitate dissolved

(e) What conclusions can you draw about solid W?

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17 [Turn over


8

4 When iron nails rust, the mass of the nails increases.


Plan an experiment to investigate if iron nails rust more quickly in tap water or in distilled water.
You are provided with new iron nails and common laboratory apparatus.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

[Total: 6]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2017 0620/62/O/N/17


Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

CHEMISTRY 0620/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2018

45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*9042823184*

Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.


Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
Electronic calculators may be used.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

IB18 11_0620_22/4RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Oxygen and fluorine are gaseous elements next to each other in the Periodic Table.

Under the same conditions of temperature and pressure, oxygen diffuses ......1...... than fluorine
because its ......2...... is less than that of fluorine.

Which words correctly complete gaps 1 and 2?

1 2

A faster molecular mass


B faster reactivity
C slower molecular mass
D slower reactivity

2 The diagrams show four pieces of laboratory equipment.

balance pipette stop-clock thermometer

Which equipment is essential to find out if dissolving a salt in water is an exothermic process?

balance pipette stop-clock thermometer

A    
B    
C    
D    

45
3 How many neutrons are present in the atom 21 X ?

A 21 B 24 C 45 D 66

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


3

4 Two naturally occurring isotopes of oxygen are 16O and 17O.

Which statement is correct?

A Both isotopes react with iron to form rust.


B Neither isotope reacts with iron to form rust.
C Only 16O reacts with iron to form rust.
D Only 17O reacts with iron to form rust.

5 How many electrons are used to form covalent bonds in a molecule of methanol, CH3OH?

A 5 B 6 C 8 D 10

6 Potassium bromide and methanol are both compounds.

Their melting points are different.

Which row is correct?

substance with the


reason why the melting points are different
higher melting point
A methanol the attractive forces between oppositely charged ions
is greater than the attractive forces between molecules
B methanol the attractive forces between molecules is greater
than the attractive forces between oppositely charged ions
C potassium bromide the attractive forces between oppositely charged ions
is greater than the attractive forces between molecules
D potassium bromide the attractive forces between molecules is greater
than the attractive forces between oppositely charged ions

7 Which gas sample contains the smallest number of molecules?

A 4 g of helium
B 16 g of oxygen
C 28 g of carbon monoxide
D 28 g of nitrogen

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


4

8 The equation for the reaction between calcium carbonate and dilute nitric acid is shown.

CaCO3(s) + 2HNO3(aq) → Ca(NO3)2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)

25 g of calcium carbonate is reacted with an excess of dilute nitric acid.

Which mass of calcium nitrate and which volume of carbon dioxide is produced at room
temperature and pressure?

mass of volume of
calcium nitrate / g carbon dioxide / dm3

A 29 6
B 29 12
C 41 6
D 41 12

9 The formulae of some ions are shown.

positive ion negative ion

Ti4+ PO43–
Al 3+ SO42–
Mg2+ NO3–
K+ Cl –

Which formula is not correct?

A Al 3(SO4)2 B K3PO4 C Mg(NO3)2 D TiCl 4

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


5

10 Concentrated aqueous copper(II) chloride is electrolysed using copper electrodes as shown.

power supply

+ –
copper electrodes

aqueous copper(II) chloride

What happens to the mass of each electrode during this process?

positive electrode negative electrode

A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


6

11 The diagram shows a circuit used to electrolyse aqueous copper(II) sulfate.

power supply
+ –

3 4

+ –
copper electrodes

1
aqueous
2
copper(II) sulfate

Which arrows indicate the movement of the copper ions in the electrolyte and of the electrons in
the external circuit?

copper ions electrons

A 1 3
B 1 4
C 2 3
D 2 4

12 Hydrogen peroxide, H–O–O–H, decomposes to form water and oxygen.

2H2O2(g) → 2H2O(g) + O2(g)

The bond energies are shown in the table. The reaction is exothermic.

bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol

O–H +460
O–O +150
O=O +496

What is the energy change for the reaction?

A –346 kJ / mol B –196 kJ / mol C +196 kJ / mol D +346 kJ / mol

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


7

13 The equation for the formation of ammonia is shown.

N2 + 3H2 → 2NH3

The energy level diagram for the reaction is shown.

activation
energy
= +250 kJ / mol
total energy
N2 + 3H2 released
energy
= –342 kJ / mol
energy
change
2NH3

progress of reaction

What is the energy change for the reaction?

A –592 kJ / mol
B –92 kJ / mol
C +92 kJ / mol
D +592 kJ / mol

14 The rate of reaction between magnesium ribbon and 2 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid at 25 °C to
produce hydrogen gas is measured.

In another experiment, either the concentration of the hydrochloric acid or the temperature is
changed. All other conditions are kept the same.

Which conditions increase the rate of reaction?

A 1 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid at 25 °C

B 2 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid at 10 °C

C 2 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid at 20 °C

D 3 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid at 25 °C

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


8

15 Methanol is prepared by the reversible reaction shown.

CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)

The forward reaction is exothermic.

Which conditions produce the highest equilibrium yield of methanol?

temperature pressure

A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low

16 The thermite reaction can be used to produce iron from iron(III) oxide.

The equation for the reaction is shown.

2Al + Fe2O3 → 2Fe + Al 2O3

Which statements about this reaction are correct?

1 Aluminium is the oxidising agent.


2 Aluminium is less reactive than iron.
3 Electrons are transferred from aluminium to iron.

4 The iron in the iron(III) oxide is reduced.

A 1 and 3 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

17 In which row are the oxides correctly identified?

acidic basic

A magnesium oxide, calcium oxide sulfur dioxide, carbon dioxide


B magnesium oxide, sulfur dioxide carbon dioxide, calcium oxide
C sulfur dioxide, carbon dioxide calcium oxide, magnesium oxide
D sulfur dioxide, magnesium oxide calcium oxide, carbon dioxide

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


9

18 When dilute sulfuric acid is added to solid X, a colourless solution is formed and a gas is
produced.

What is X?

A copper(II) oxide

B sodium oxide
C copper(II) carbonate
D sodium carbonate

19 A few drops of methyl orange are added to a reaction mixture.

During the reaction, a gas is produced and the methyl orange turns from red to orange.

What are the reactants?

A aqueous sodium hydroxide and ammonium chloride


B aqueous sodium hydroxide and calcium carbonate
C dilute hydrochloric acid and magnesium
D dilute hydrochloric acid and aqueous sodium hydroxide

20 Some general rules for the solubility of salts in water are listed.

● Carbonates are insoluble (except ammonium carbonate, potassium carbonate and


sodium carbonate).

● Chlorides are soluble (except lead(II) chloride and silver chloride).

● Nitrates are soluble.

● Sulfates are soluble (except barium sulfate, calcium sulfate and lead(II) sulfate).

Which substances produce an insoluble salt when aqueous solutions of them are mixed?

A barium chloride and magnesium nitrate


B calcium chloride and ammonium nitrate
C silver nitrate and zinc chloride
D sodium carbonate and potassium sulfate

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


10

21 Elements in Group I of the Periodic Table react with water.

Which row describes the products made in the reaction and the trend in reactivity of the
elements?

products trend in reactivity

A metal hydroxide and hydrogen less reactive down the group


B metal hydroxide and hydrogen more reactive down the group
C metal oxide and hydrogen less reactive down the group
D metal oxide and hydrogen more reactive down the group

22 The equation shows the reaction between a halogen and aqueous bromide ions.

X2 + 2Br– → 2X– + Br2


......1...... ......2...... ......3......

Which words complete gaps 1, 2 and 3?

1 2 3

A chlorine brown colourless


B chlorine colourless brown
C iodine brown colourless
D iodine colourless brown

23 An inert gas R is used to fill weather balloons.

Which descriptions of R are correct?

number of outer shell


structure of gas R
electrons in atoms of R

A 2 diatomic molecules
B 2 single atoms
C 8 diatomic molecules
D 8 single atoms

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


11

24 Heating copper(II) carbonate produces copper(II) oxide and carbon dioxide.

Heating the copper(II) oxide formed with carbon produces copper.

Which processes are involved in this conversion of copper(II) carbonate to copper?

A sublimation followed by oxidation


B sublimation followed by reduction
C thermal decomposition followed by oxidation
D thermal decomposition followed by reduction

25 Four metals, W, X, Y and Z, are separately reacted with water and dilute hydrochloric acid.

The results are shown.

metal
W X Y Z

reaction with water fizzes no reaction fizzes no reaction


vigorously
reaction with dilute fizzes no reaction fizzes fizzes
hydrochloric acid violently

What is the order of reactivity of the four metals starting with the least reactive?

least reactive most reactive

A X W Z Y
B X Z W Y
C Y W Z X
D Y Z W X

26 Which statement about the uses of metals is not correct?

A Aluminium is used in aircraft because of its strength and good electrical conductivity.
B Copper is used in electrical wiring because of its good electrical conductivity.
C Stainless steel resists corrosion and is used to make cutlery.
D Transition elements are often used as catalysts.

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


12

27 Bauxite contains aluminium oxide.

Aluminium is extracted from aluminium oxide by electrolysis.

Why is cryolite added to the electrolytic cell used to extract aluminium?

A Cryolite prevents the carbon anodes being burned away.


B Cryolite removes impurities from the bauxite.
C Cryolite increases the rate at which aluminium ions are discharged.
D Molten cryolite dissolves the aluminium oxide.

28 Which statement about the Haber process is correct?

A The hydrogen used is obtained from the air.


B The nitrogen used is obtained from nitrates in the soil.
C Nitrogen reacts with hydrogen to make ammonia.
D The reaction takes place at room temperature and pressure.

29 Which statements about sulfur dioxide pollution are correct?

1 It increases the pH of rivers.

2 It damages limestone buildings.

3 It causes respiratory problems.

A 1 only B 2 only C 1 and 3 D 2 and 3

30 Argon is a noble gas used to fill light bulbs.

What is the approximate percentage of argon in air?

A 1% B 20% C 79% D 99%

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


13

31 The diagrams show experiments involving the rusting of iron.

tube P tube Q tube R

oil
iron nails

water water boiled to anhydrous


remove the air calcium chloride
to dry the air

A student predicted the following results.

1 In tube P, the iron nails rust.


2 In tube Q, the iron nails do not rust.
3 In tube R, the iron nails do not rust.

Which predictions are correct?

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

32 In the carbon cycle, which two processes add carbon dioxide to the atmosphere?

A combustion and carbonate formation


B combustion and photosynthesis
C combustion and respiration
D respiration and photosynthesis

33 Which statement about sulfur or one of its compounds is correct?

A Sulfur occurs naturally as the element sulfur.


B Sulfur dioxide is used to kill bacteria in drinking water.
C Sulfuric acid is a weak acid.
D Dilute sulfuric acid is a dehydrating agent.

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18 [Turn over


14

34 What is not a use of lime?

A It is used as a bleach in the manufacture of wood pulp.


B It is used to desulfurise flue gases.
C It is used to neutralise acidic industrial waste.
D It is used to treat acidic soil.

35 Which equation representing a reaction of methane is correct?

A CH4 + Cl 2 → CH3Cl + HCl

B CH4 + Cl 2 → CH4Cl 2

C CH4 + Cl 2 → CH2Cl 2 + H2

D 2CH4 + 2Cl 2 → 2CH3Cl + Cl 2 + H2

36 Which two compounds are molecules which both contain a double bond?

A ethane and ethanoic acid


B ethane and ethanol
C ethene and ethanoic acid
D ethene and ethanol

37 Ethanol can be formed by:

1 fermentation
2 reaction between steam and ethene.

Which of these processes use a catalyst?

1 2

A  
B  
C  
D  

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


15

38 Ethanol is manufactured from ethene.

What is an advantage of this process?

A It is a continuous process.
B It has high labour costs.
C It needs high temperature and pressure.
D It uses non-renewable materials.

39 Which reaction can be used to make ethanoic acid?

A oxidation of ethanol
B oxidation of ethene
C reduction of ethanol
D reduction of ethene

40 The structure of an addition polymer is shown.

H OH H OH H OH

C C C C C C

H H H H H H

Which monomer is used to make this polymer?

A B C D

OH OH OH H OH H H

H C H H C C H C C C C

H H H HO H H OH

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/22/O/N/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
I II III IV V VI VII VIII

© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
16

55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

0620/22/O/N/18
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4401701629*

CHEMISTRY 0620/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2018
 1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 16.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 11_0620_42/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Element  X can undergo the following physical changes.

gaseous X
boiling or
evaporation
2

liquid X 4

3
1
solid X

(a) (i) Give the scientific name for each of the numbered physical changes.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................

3 ...........................................................................................................................................

4 ...........................................................................................................................................
[4]

(ii) Explain why the changes shown are physical changes.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) One difference between boiling and evaporation is the rate at which the processes occur.

State one other difference between boiling and evaporation.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(b) Describe the separation, arrangement and motion of particles of element X in the solid state.

separation ...................................................................................................................................

arrangement ...............................................................................................................................

motion .........................................................................................................................................
[3]

(c) Element  X is a Group I metal. It burns in air to form an oxide X2O.

Write a chemical equation for this reaction.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


3

2 Magnesium, calcium and strontium are Group II elements.

(a) Complete the table to show the arrangement of electrons in a calcium atom.

shell number 1 2 3 4

number of electrons
[1]

(b) Describe how the arrangement of electrons in a strontium atom is:

(i) similar to the arrangement of electrons in a calcium atom

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

(ii) different from the arrangement of electrons in a calcium atom.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Calcium reacts with cold water to form two products:

●●  colourless gas, P, which ‘pops’ with a lighted splint


a
●● a weakly alkaline solution, Q, which turns milky when carbon dioxide is bubbled through it.

(i) Name gas P.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Identify the ion responsible for making solution Q alkaline.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) Suggest the pH of solution Q.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of calcium with cold water.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18 [Turn over


4

(d) M
 agnesium reacts with chlorine to form magnesium chloride, MgCl 2. Magnesium chloride is
an ionic compound.

(i) Complete the diagrams to show the electronic structures of the ions in magnesium chloride.
Show the charges on the ions.

...... ...... ......

Cl Mg Cl

[3]

(ii) Give three physical properties that are typical of ionic compounds such as MgCl 2.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................

3 ...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

(e) Aqueous magnesium chloride is added to aqueous silver nitrate. A white precipitate forms.

Write an ionic equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

 [Total: 16]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


5

3 Sulfur is an important element.

(a) Explain how burning fossil fuels containing sulfur leads to the formation of acid rain.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) S
 ulfuric acid is manufactured by the Contact process. One step in the Contact process involves
a reversible reaction in which sulfur trioxide, SO3, is formed.

(i) W
 rite a chemical equation for this reversible reaction. Include the correct symbol to show
that the reaction is reversible.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) State the conditions and name the catalyst used in this reversible reaction.

temperature .........................................................................................................................

pressure ...............................................................................................................................

catalyst ................................................................................................................................
[3]

(iii) D
 escribe how the sulfur trioxide formed is converted into sulfuric acid in the next steps of
the Contact process.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18 [Turn over


6

(c) Dilute sulfuric acid is used to make salts known as sulfates.

A method consisting of three steps is used to make zinc sulfate from zinc carbonate.

step 1 A
 dd an excess of zinc carbonate to 20 cm3 of 0.4 mol / dm3 dilute sulfuric acid until
the reaction is complete.

step 2 Filter the mixture.

step 3 Heat the filtrate until a saturated solution forms and then allow it to crystallise.

(i) Name a suitable piece of apparatus for measuring 20 cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid in step 1.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) State two observations which would show that the reaction is complete in step 1.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) Why is it important to add an excess of zinc carbonate in step 1?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iv) What is meant by the term saturated solution in step 3?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(v) The equation for the reaction is shown.

ZnCO3(s) + H2SO4(aq) ZnSO4(......) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)

Complete the equation by inserting the state symbol for zinc sulfate. [1]

(vi) N
 ame another zinc compound which could be used to make zinc  sulfate from dilute
sulfuric acid using this method.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(vii) Suggest why this method would not work to make barium sulfate from barium carbonate
and dilute sulfuric acid.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


7

(d) In a titration, a student added 25.0 cm3 of 0.200 mol / dm3 aqueous sodium hydroxide to a


conical  flask. The student then added a few drops of methyl  orange to the solution in the
conical flask.
Dilute sulfuric acid was then added from a burette to the conical flask. The volume of dilute
sulfuric acid needed to neutralise the aqueous sodium hydroxide was 20.0 cm3.

2NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + 2H2O

(i) What was the colour of the methyl orange in the aqueous sodium hydroxide?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Determine the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in g / dm3.

●  alculate the number of moles of aqueous sodium  hydroxide added to the conical
C
flask.

 .............................. mol

● Calculate the number of moles of dilute sulfuric acid added from the burette.

 .............................. mol

● Calculate the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in mol / dm3.

 .............................. mol / dm3

● Calculate the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in g / dm3.

 .............................. g / dm3
[4]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18 [Turn over


8

(e) Iron(II) sulfate decomposes when heated strongly.

2FeSO4(s) Fe2O3(s) + SO2(g) + SO3(g)

15.20 g of FeSO4(s) was heated and formed 4.80 g of Fe2O3(s).

[Mr, FeSO4 = 152; Mr, Fe2O3 = 160]

Calculate the percentage yield for this reaction.

 .............................. % [3]

 [Total: 26]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


9

4 A student investigated the progress of the reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid, HCl, and an
excess of large pieces of marble, CaCO3, using the apparatus shown.

gas syringe

dilute
hydrochloric acid an excess of large
pieces of marble

(a) A graph of the volume of gas produced against time is shown.

150

100
volume of gas
produced / cm3
50

0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / s

(i) How does the shape of the graph show that the rate of reaction decreased as the reaction
progressed?

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Why did the rate of reaction decrease as the reaction progressed?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(iii) After how many seconds did the reaction finish?

 .............................. s [1]

(b) T
 he experiment was repeated using the same mass of smaller pieces of marble. All other
conditions were kept the same.

Draw a graph on the grid to show the progress of the reaction using the smaller pieces of
marble. [2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18 [Turn over


10

(c) The original experiment was repeated at a higher temperature. All other conditions were kept
the same.

 escribe and explain, in terms of collisions between particles, the effect of using a higher
D
temperature on the time taken for the reaction to finish.

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [5]

 [Total: 10]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


11

5 Alkynes are a homologous series of unsaturated hydrocarbons.


 ll members contain a C≡C triple bond.
A

(a) Complete the table showing information about the first three alkynes.

formula C 2H 2 C 3H 4

structure H–C≡C–H H–C≡C–CH3 H–C≡C–CH2–CH3

name ethyne butyne


[2]

(b) C
 omplete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of ethyne,
H–C≡C–H. Show outer shell electrons only.

H C C H

[2]

(c) Compounds in the same homologous series have the same general formula.

(i) Give two other characteristics of members of a homologous series.

1 ...........................................................................................................................................

2 ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Use the information in the table in (a) to deduce the general formula of alkynes.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(d) Alkynes are unsaturated.

Describe a test for unsaturation.

test ..............................................................................................................................................

result ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18 [Turn over


12

(e) (i) Name an oxidising agent which can be used to oxidise ethanol to ethanoic acid.

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(ii) Draw the structure of ethanoic acid. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

[1]

(f) Carboxylic acids can be converted into esters.

(i) T
 he ester formed by reacting propanoic acid and methanol has the molecular formula
C4H8O2.

Name this ester and draw its structure. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.

name of the ester .................................................................................................................

structure of the ester

[2]

(ii) Name another ester with the molecular formula C4H8O2.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(g) Polyesters are polymers.

(i) What type of polymerisation is used in the manufacture of polyesters?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Name a polyester.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

 [Total: 17]

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


14

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


15

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18


The Periodic Table of Elements
Group

© UCLES 2018
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2

H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10

Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
16

85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

0620/42/O/N/18
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*7208760726*

CHEMISTRY 0620/62

Paper 6 Alternative to Practical October/November 2018


 1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.

Answer all questions.


Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.

At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.

This document consists of 9 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

IB18 11_0620_62/3RP
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2

1 Magnesium ribbon was burned in air.

.........................................

magnesium
burning

(a) Complete the box to name the apparatus. [1]

(b) Suggest the appearance of the product formed when the magnesium ribbon was burned in air.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Name the product formed when the magnesium ribbon was burned in air.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

The product from burning the magnesium ribbon in air was added to water and heated. The solution
formed was tested with Universal Indicator solution.

(d) Suggest why the product was heated after it had been added to water. Explain your answer.

.....................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) Suggest the pH value shown when Universal Indicator was added to the mixture.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) State one safety precaution that should be taken when magnesium is burned in air.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 7]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


3

2 A student investigated the rate of reaction between solution L, solution M and hydrochloric acid.
When these chemicals react they form iodine. Sodium thiosulfate solution and starch solution were
used to show how fast the reaction proceeded.

Five experiments were done.

Experiment 1

●●  measuring cylinder was used to add 10 cm3 of solution L to a conical flask.


A
●● 10  cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, 10  cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution and 1  cm3 of
starch solution were then added to the conical flask.
●● The reaction was started by using a measuring cylinder to add 10 cm3 of solution M to the
conical flask. A timer was started immediately and the mixture was swirled.
●● The time taken for the mixture to turn blue-black was measured.
●● The conical flask was emptied and rinsed with distilled water.

Experiment 2

●●  measuring cylinder was used to add 8 cm3 of solution L and 2 cm3 of distilled water to the
A
conical flask.
●● 10  cm3 of dilute hydrochloric acid, 10  cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution and 1  cm3 of
starch solution were then added to the conical flask.
●● The reaction was started by using a measuring cylinder to add 10 cm3 of solution M to the
conical flask. The timer was started immediately and the mixture was swirled.
●● The time taken for the mixture to turn blue-black was measured.
●● The conical flask was emptied and rinsed with distilled water.

Experiment 3

●●  xperiment 2 was repeated but 6 cm3 of solution L and 4 cm3 of distilled water were added to
E
the conical flask before adding the other reagents.

Experiment 4

●●  xperiment 2 was repeated but 5 cm3 of solution L and 5 cm3 of distilled water were added to
E
the conical flask before adding the other reagents.

Experiment 5

●●  xperiment 2 was repeated but 3 cm3 of solution L and 7 cm3 of distilled water were added to
E
the conical flask before adding the other reagents.

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18 [Turn over


4

(a) Use the stop-clock diagrams to record the time taken for each experiment in the table.

volume of time taken for


experiment volume of stop-clock
distilled the mixture to
number solution L / cm3 diagram
water / cm3 turn blue-black / s
0
seconds
0

1 10 0 45 15 5 15

10
minutes
30

0
0

2 8 2 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

3 6 4 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

4 5 5 45 15 5 15

10
30

0
0

5 3 7 45 15 5 15

10
30

[4]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


5

(b) Plot the results for Experiments 1–5 on the grid. Draw a smooth line graph.

140

120

100

80
time taken for
the mixture to
turn blue-black / s
60

40

20

0
0 2 4 6 8 10
volume of solution L / cm3
[4]

(c) 
From your graph, deduce the time taken for the mixture to turn blue-black if Experiment 2
were repeated using 4 cm3 of solution L and 6 cm3 of distilled water.

Show clearly on the grid how you worked out your answer.

............................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18 [Turn over


6

(d) (i) In which experiment, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, was the rate of reaction greatest?

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Explain, in terms of particles, why the rate of reaction was greatest in this experiment.

..............................................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(e) (i) Suggest an advantage of using a graduated pipette instead of a measuring cylinder to
measure solution L.

........................................................................................................................................ [1]

(ii) Suggest and explain a disadvantage of using a graduated pipette instead of a measuring
cylinder to measure solution M.

..............................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................ [2]

(f) Suggest one way to improve the reliability of the results of these experiments.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

 [Total: 18]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


7

3 Solid  N and solid O were analysed. Solid N was ammonium sulfate. Tests were done on each solid.

tests on solid N


Complete the expected observations.

(a) Describe the appearance of solid N.

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

Solid  N was dissolved in distilled water to form solution N. Solution N was divided into two portions
in two test‑tubes.

(b) Dilute nitric acid and aqueous barium nitrate were added to the first portion of solution N.

observations ......................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the second portion of solution N. The mixture was
heated and the gas produced was tested.

observations ...............................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Name the gas produced in (c).

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18 [Turn over


8

tests on solid O

Some of the tests and observations are shown.

tests on solid O observations

The appearance of solid O was studied. white crystals

Distilled water was added to some of solid O to


form solution O.

Solution O was divided into two equal portions in


two test‑tubes.

test 1
no reaction
An excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide was
added to the first portion of solution O.

test 2

Dilute nitric acid and aqueous silver nitrate were white precipitate
added to the second portion of solution O.

test 3

A flame test was done on the rest of solid O. lilac colour

(e) What conclusion can you draw about the identity of solid O from test 1?

............................................................................................................................................... [1]

(f) Identify solid  O.

............................................................................................................................................... [2]

 [Total: 9]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


9

4 When solid  C and solid D separately react with dilute hydrochloric acid, one reaction is exothermic
and one reaction is endothermic.

Plan an investigation to determine:

●●  hich reaction is exothermic and which reaction is endothermic


w
●● which energy change is greater.

You are provided with solid C and solid D, dilute hydrochloric acid and common laboratory apparatus.

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................... [6]

 [Total: 6]

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18 [Turn over


10

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


11

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18


12

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.

Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2018 0620/62/O/N/18

You might also like